Home
        Logic Pro 9 Effects
         Contents
1.      Chapter9 Modulation Effects    e Sync button  Synchronizes the delay to the project tempo  You can choose musical  note values with the Time knob       Level knob and field  Sets the level of the delay added to the ring modulated or  frequency shifted signal  A Level value of 0 passes the effect signal directly to the output   bypass      Modulating the Ringshifter with the Envelope Follower   The oscillator Frequency and Dry Wet parameters can be modulated with the internal  envelope follower   and the LFO  see Modulating the Ringshifter with the LFO   The  oscillator frequency even allows modulation through the 0 Hz point  thus changing the  oscillation direction     The envelope follower analyzes the amplitude  volume  of the input signal and uses this  to create a continuously changing control signal   a dynamic volume envelope of the  input signal  This control signal can be used for modulation purposes          Power button  Turns the envelope follower on or off and enables the following  parameters       Sens itivity  slider and field  Determines how responsive the envelope follower is to the  input signal  At lower settings  the envelope follower reacts only to the most dominant  signal peaks  At higher settings  the envelope follower tracks the signal more closely   but may react less dynamically       Attack slider and field  Sets the response time of the envelope follower       Decay slider and field  Controls the time it takes the envelope follower to return 
2.      You can also adjust the decibel scale of the graphic display by vertically dragging either  the left or right edge of the display  where the dB scale is shown  when the Analyzer is  not active  When the Analyzer is active  dragging the left edge adjusts the linear dB scale   and dragging the right edge adjusts the Analyzer dB scale     To increase the resolution of the EQ curve display in the most interesting area around  the zero line  drag the dB scale  on the left side of the graphic display  upward  Drag  downward to decrease the resolution     Chapter5 Equalizers    Using the Channel EQ Analyzer   The Analyzer  when active  makes uses of a mathematical process called a Fast Fourier  Transform  FFT  to provide a real time curve of all frequency components in the incoming  signal  This is superimposed over any EQ curves you have set  The Analyzer curve uses  the same scale as the EQ curves  making it easy to recognize important frequencies in  the incoming audio  This also simplifies the task of setting EQ curves to raise or lower the  levels of frequencies frequency ranges     The bands derived from FFT analysis are divided in a logarithmic scale   there are more  bands in higher octaves than in lower ones     As soon as the Analyzer is activated  you can change the scaling with the Analyzer Top  parameter  on the right side of the graphic display  The visible area represents a dynamic  range of 60 dB  Drag vertically to set the maximum value to anywhere between  20 
3.     Rate knob and field  Defines the frequency  the speed  of the LFO     Intensity slider and field  Determines the modulation amount     Mix slider and field  Determines the balance between dry and wet signals     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    Microphaser  The Microphaser is a simple plug in that allows you to quickly create swooshing  phasing  effects      x  Master Volume  PF View   ShowCS v Show Insert v    Bypass  lt   gt   default    Microphaser    LFO Rate  0 22Hz           LFO Rate slider and field  Defines the frequency  the speed  of the LFO      Feedback slider and field  Determines the amount of the effect signal that is routed back  into the input  This can change the tonal color and or make the sweeping effect more  pronounced       Intensity slider and field  Determines the amount of modulation     Modulation Delay   The Modulation Delay is based on the same principles as the Flanger and Chorus effects   but you can set the delay time  allowing both chorus and flanging effects to be generated   It can also be used without modulation to create resonator or doubling effects  The  modulation section consists of two LFOs with variable frequencies     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 187    188    Although rich  combined flanging and chorus effects are possible  the Modulation Delay  is capable of producing some extreme modulation effects  These include emulations of  tape speed fluctuations and metallic  robot like modulations of incoming signals        Feedback slide
4.    or    user        To add notes to  or remove notes from  the chosen scale or chord  Click unused keys on the small keyboard to add them to the scale or chord     Click selected notes  illuminated  to remove them     Tip  Your last edit is remembered  If you choose a new scale or chord but do not make  any changes  you can revert to the previously set scale by choosing    user    in the pop up  menu     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Formant Filter Parameters   The EVOC 20 TrackOscillator features two formant filter banks   one for the Analysis In  section and one for the Synthesis In section  In essence  the entire frequency spectrum  of an incoming signal is analyzed  Analysis section   and equally divided into a number  of frequency bands  Each ls bank can control up to 20 of these frequency bands  For  more information  see Hc      ca der V        s a Vocoder Work         Chapter 6 Filter Effects 149    150    The Formant Filter display is divided in two by a horizontal line  The upper half applies  to the Analysis section and the lower half to the Synthesis section  Parameter changes  are instantly reflected in the Formant Filter display  providing invaluable feedback on  what is happening to the signal as it is routed through the two formant filter banks     evoc 20 T0    highest    QOH     Formant Stretch Fonmant Shift Resonance         High and Low Frequency parameters  Determine the lowest and highest frequencies  allowed to pass by the filter section  Frequencies that fa
5.   Decay knob and field  Sets the decay time for the envelope     Sustain knob and field  Sets the sustain time for the envelope  If the input signal falls  below the threshold level before the envelope sustain phase  the release phase is  triggered     Release knob and field  Sets the release time for the envelope  this is triggered as soon  as the input signal falls below the threshold      Dynamic knob and field  Determines the input signal modulation amount  You can  modulate the peak value of the envelope section by varying this control     Cutoff Mod  slider and field  Determines the impact of the envelope on the cutoff  frequency     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 133    134    AutoFilter LFO Parameters  The LFO is used as a modulation source for filter cutoff        Coarse Rate knob  Fine Rate slider and field  Used to set the speed of LFO modulation   Drag the Coarse Rate knob to set the LFO frequency in Hertz  Drag the Fine Rate slider   the semicircular slider above the Coarse Rate knob  to fine tune the frequency     Note  The labels shown for the Rate knob  slider  and field change when you activate  Beat Sync  Only the Rate knob  and field  is available     Beat Sync button  Activate to synchronize the LFO to the host application tempo  You  can choose from bar values  triplet values  and more  These are determined by the Rate  knob or field     Phase knob and field  Shifts the phase relationship between the LFO rate and the host  application tempo   when Beat Sync is 
6.   Sets the amount of distortion applied after the filter section     AutoFilter Output Parameters  The Output parameters are used to set the wet dry balance and overall level          Dry Signal slider and field  Sets the amount of the original dry signal added to the filtered  signal     e Main Out slider and field  Sets the overall output level of the AutoFilter  allowing you  to compensate for higher levels caused by adding distortion   or by the filtering process  itself     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    EVOC 20 Filterbank    The EVOC 20 Filterbank consists of two formant filter banks  The input signal passes  through the two filter banks in parallel  Each bank features level faders for up to 20  frequency bands  allowing independent level control of each band  Setting a level fader  to its minimum value completely suppresses the formants in that band  You can control  the position of the filter bands with the Formant Shift parameter  You can also crossfade  between the two filter banks     A Short Primer on Formants   A formant is a peak in the frequency spectrum of a sound  When the term is used in  relation to human voices  formants are the key component that enables humans to  distinguish between different vowel sounds   based purely on the frequency of these  sounds  Formants in human speech and singing are produced by the vocal tract  with  most vowel sounds containing four or more formants     Getting to Know the EVOC 20 Filterbank Interface   The EVOC 20 Filterbank 
7.   Signals that exceed the threshold  are reduced in level     Attack knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes for the compressor to react when  the signal exceeds the threshold     Release knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes for the compressor to stop  reducing the signal  after the signal falls below the threshold     Ratio slider and field  Sets the ratio by which the signal is reduced  when it exceeds the  threshold     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Silver Gate  The Silver Gate is a simplified version of the Noise Gate  for usage tips  see Using the  Noise Gate         Lookahead slider and field  Sets how far ahead the noise gate analyzes the incoming  signal  allowing the Silver Gate to respond more quickly to peak levels     Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level  Signals that fall below the threshold  will be reduced in level     Attack knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to fully open the gate after the  signal exceeds the threshold     Hold knob and field  Sets the amount of time the gate is kept open after the signal falls  below the threshold     Release knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to fully close the gate after the  signal falls below the threshold     Surround Compressor   The Surround Compressor  based on the Compressor  is specifically designed for  compression of complete surround mixes  It is commonly inserted in a surround output  channel strip  or in audio or aux channel strips   busses  
8.   The main use of a limiter is to prevent clipping while preserving the maximum  overall signal level       Noise gates  Noise gates alter the signal in a way that is opposite to that used by  compressors or limiters  Whereas a compressor lowers the level when the signal is  louder than the threshold  a noise gate lowers the signal level whenever it falls below  the threshold  Louder sounds pass through unchanged  but softer sounds  such as  ambient noise or the decay of a sustained instrument  are cut off  Noise gates are often  used to eliminate low level noise or hum from an audio signal     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Adaptive Limiter   The Adaptive Limiter is a versatile tool for controlling the perceived loudness of sounds   It works by rounding and smoothing peaks in the signal  producing an effect similar to  an analog amplifier being driven hard  Like an amplifier  it can slightly color the sound  of the signal  You can use the Adaptive Limiter to achieve maximum gain  without  introducing generally unwanted distortion and clipping  which can occur when the signal  exceeds 0 dBFS     The Adaptive Limiter is typically used on the final mix  where it may be placed after a  compressor  such as the Multipressor  and before a final gain control  resulting in a mix  of maximum loudness  The Adaptive Limiter can produce a louder sounding mix than  can be achieved by normalizing the signal     Note  Using the Adaptive Limiter adds latency when the Lookahead parameter is
9.   also known as impulses  in the input  signal  Transients are very fast  non periodic sound events in the attack portion of the  signal  The more obvious this impulse is  the easier it is for the BPM Counter to detect  the tempo  As a result  percussive drum and instrumental rhythm parts  such as basslines   are suitable for tempo analysis  Pad sounds are a poor choice        167       168    The LED shows the current analysis status  If the LED is flashing  a tempo measurement  is taking place  When the LED is continuously lit  analysis is complete  and the tempo is  displayed  The measurement ranges from 80 to 160 beats per minute  The measured  value is displayed with an accuracy of one decimal place  Click the LED to reset the  BPM Counter     Note  The BPM Counter also detects tempo variations in the signal and tries to analyze  them accurately  If the LED starts flashing during playback  this indicates that the   BPM Counter has detected a tempo that has deviated from the last received  or set   tempo  As soon as a new  constant tempo is recognized  the LED is solidly lit and the new  tempo displayed     Correlation Meter  The Correlation Meter displays the phase relationship of a stereo signal          Acorrelation of  1  the far right position  means that the left and right channels correlate  100     they are completely in phase      A correlation of 0  the center position  indicates the widest permissible left right  divergence  often audible as an extremely wide s
10.   four   and enables you to independently compress each band  After compression is  applied  the bands are combined into a single output signal     The advantage of compressing different frequency bands separately is that it allows you  to apply more compression to the bands that need it  without affecting other bands  This  avoids the pumping effect often associated with high amounts of compression     As the Multipressor allows the use of higher compression ratios on specific frequency  bands  it can achieve a higher average volume without causing audible artifacts     Raising the overall volume level can result in a corresponding increase in the existing  noise floor  Each frequency band features downward expansion  which allows you to  reduce or suppress this noise     Downward expansion works as a counterpart to compression  Whereas the compressor  compresses the dynamic range of higher volume levels  the downward expander expands  the dynamic range of the lower volume levels  With downward expansion  the signal is  reduced in level when it falls below the threshold level  This works in a similar way to a  noise gate  but rather than abruptly cutting off the sound  it smoothly fades the volume  with an adjustable ratio     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Multipressor Parameters   The parameters in the Multipressor window are grouped into three main areas  the  graphic display in the upper section  the set of controls for each frequency band in the  lower section  and th
11.   similar to a Leslie 760 model     Single  Simulates the sound of a Leslie with a single  full range rotor  The sound  resembles the Leslie 825 model     Split  The bass rotor   s signal is routed slightly to the left  and the treble rotor   s signal  is routed more towards the right     Wood  amp  Horn IR  This setting uses an impulse response of a Leslie with a wooden  enclosure     Proline  amp  Horn IR  This setting uses an impulse response of a Leslie with a more open  enclosure     Split  amp  Horn IR  This setting uses an impulse response of a Leslie with the bass rotor  signal routed slightly to the left  and the treble rotor signal routed more to the right     Advanced Rotor Speaker Parameters  The Rotor Cabinet offers the following advanced rotor speaker parameters          Horn Deflector button  A Leslie cabinet contains a double horn  with a deflector at the  horn mouth  This deflector makes the Leslie sound  Some people remove the deflector  to increase amplitude modulation  and decrease frequency modulation  You can emulate  this by using the Horn Deflector button to switch the deflectors on and off     e Motor Ctrl pop up menu  You can set different speeds for the bass and treble rotors in  the Motor Ctrl pop up menu     Note  If you choose Single Cabinet from the Cabinet menu  the Motor Ctrl setting is  irrelevant  because there are no separate bass and treble rotors in a single cabinet       Normal  Both rotors use the speed determined by the rotor speed but
12.   stage       Master knob  Sets the output volume of the amplifier going to the cabinet  For tube  amplifiers  increasing the Master level typically produces a somewhat compressed and  saturated sound  resulting in a more distorted and powerful   that is  louder   signal   High Master settings can produce an extremely loud output that can damage your  speakers or hearing  so ramp this up slowly  The final output level of Amp Designer is  set with the Output slider at the lower right edge of the interface  See Setting Amp  Designer s Output Level     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 23    24    Getting to Know Amp Designer   s Effects Parameters  The effects parameters include Tremolo  Vibrato  and Reverb  which emulate the processors  found on many amplifiers  these controls are found in the center of the knobs section        You can use the switch toward the right to select either Tremolo  TREM   which modulates  the amplitude or volume of the sound  or Vibrato  VIB   which modulates the pitch     Reverb  which is controlled by a switch in the middle  can be added to either of these  effects  or used independently     Note  The Effects section is placed before the Presence and Master controls in the signal  flow  and receives the pre amplified  pre Master signal     Reverb  Tremolo  and Vibrato are described in the following sections     e Using Amp Designer s Reverb Effect  e Using Amp Designer s Tremolo and Vibrato Effects    Using Amp Designer s Reverb Effect   Reverb is always 
13.   the target Match EQ instance  See below    To match the EQ of a project mix to the EQ of a source audio file  In the project you want to match to the source audio file  instantiate a Match EQ  typically  on Output 1 2      Drag the source audio file onto the Template Learn button     Return to the start of your mix  click Current Material Learn  then play your mix  the current  material  from start to finish     When you are done  click Current Material Match  this automatically disengages the  Current Material Learn button      To use the matched EQ on a channel strip  Choose the channel strip that you want to match from the Sidechain menu of the Match EQ  window     Click the Template Learn button     Play the entire source audio file from start to finish  then click the Template Learn button  again  to stop the learn process      Return to the start of your mix  click Current Material Learn  then play your mix  the current  material  from start to finish     Chapter5 Equalizers    5 When you are done  click Current Material Match  this automatically disengages the  Current Material Learn button      Match EQ creates a filter curve based on the differences between the spectrum of the  template and the current material  This curve automatically compensates for differences  in gain between the template and the current material  with the resulting EQ curve  referenced to 0 dB  A yellow filter response curve appears in the graphic display  showing  the average spectrum of you
14.  16 if  it consists mostly of sixteenth notes       Swing slider and field  Determines the amount that even beats are delayed  A value of  50  means no swing  which is typical for most pop and rock music styles  The higher  the value  the stronger the swing effect     e Accent slider and field  Raises or lowers the level of even beats  accentuating them  Such  accents are typical of a variety of rhythmic styles  such as swing or reggae     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities    Speech Enhancer   You can use Speech Enhancer to improve speech recordings made with your computer s  internal microphone  if applicable   It combines denoising  advanced microphone  frequency remodeling  and multiband compression     Denoise    Mic Correction    Mic Model    Voice Enhonce    Enhance Mode         Denoise slider and field  Determines  your estimation of  the noise floor in your recording  and  therefore  how much noise should be eliminated  Settings towards 100 dB allow  more noise to pass  Settings towards 0 dB increasingly suppress background noise but  also proportionately increase artifacts     e Mic Correction buttons  Activate the On button to improve the frequency response of  recordings made with your built in microphone  This creates the impression that an  up market microphone was used       Mic Model pop up menu  Provides a choice of several microphone models that  compensate for tonal characteristics of particular built in Macintosh microphones     Note  You can use
15.  B  C  or no  group  indicated by     Moving the Threshold or Output Level slider for any grouped  channel will move the sliders for all channels assigned to that group     Tip  Press Command and Option while moving the Threshold or Output Level slider  of a grouped channel to temporarily unlink the channel from the group  This allows  you to make independent threshold settings while maintaining the side chain detection  link necessary for a stable surround image     Byp  Bypass  buttons  Independently bypasses the corresponding channel unless  grouped  If the channel belongs to a group  all channels in the group are bypassed     Detection pop up menu  Determines if the Surround Compressor uses the maximum  level of each signal  Max  or the summed level of all signals  Sum  to exceed or fall  below the threshold       If Max is chosen  and any of the surround channels exceeds or falls below the  Threshold  that channel  or grouped channels  is compressed     e If Sum is chosen  the combined level of all channels must exceed the Threshold  before compression occurs     Surround Compressor Main Parameters  The Surround Compressor   s Main section provides the following parameters        e Ratio knob and field  Sets the ratio of signal reduction when the threshold is exceeded     Knee knob and field  Determines the ratio of compression at levels close to the threshold       Attack knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to reach full compression  after  the signal excee
16.  Browser on the right  side of the interface  Each effect and utility is grouped into a category  such as distortion   modulation  and so on  For information about these types of stompboxes  see Distortion  Pedals  Modulation Pedals  Delay Pedals  Filter Pedals  Dynamics Pedals  and Utility Pedals     View pop up menu Import Mode button    je rere    GRINDER  mo  i  A          To hide or show the Pedal Browser  Click the disclosure triangle in the lower right corner of the Pedal area     To show only specific pedal groups in the Pedal Browser  Open the View pop up menu and choose Distortion  Modulation  Delay  Filter  Dynamics   or Utility  The Pedal Browser shows only the stompboxes within the category you choose     To show all the pedal groups  choose Show All from the View pop up menu   To add a stompbox to the Pedal area  Do one of the following     Drag the effect that you want to insert from the Pedal Browser to the appropriate Pedal  area position  This can be to the left  to the right  or in between existing pedals     Double click an effect in the Pedal Browser to add it to the right of all existing stompboxes  in the Pedal area     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    37    38    Note  Double clicking a stompbox in the Pedal Browser when a stompbox is selected in  the Pedal area will replace the selected pedal     Using Pedalboard   s Import Mode   Pedalboard has a feature you can use to import parameter settings for each type of pedal   In contrast to the plug in window S
17.  CPU demand than the other  options       Apply slider and field  Determines the impact of the filter curve on the signal     Values above 100  magnify the effect     Values below 100  reduce it     e Negative values   1  to    100   invert the peaks and troughs in the filter curve     Chapter5 Equalizers 123    124      A value of 100  has no impact on the filter curve       Smoothing slider and field  Sets the amount of smoothing for the filter curve  using a  constant bandwidth set in semitone steps  A value of 0 0 has no impact on the filter  curve  A value of 1 0 means a smoothing bandwidth of one semitone  A value of 4 0  means a smoothing bandwidth of four semitones  a major third   A value of 12 0 means  a smoothing bandwidth of one octave  and so on     Note  Smoothing has no effect on any manual changes you make to the filter curve       Fade Extremes checkbox  Extended Parameters area   Select to smooth the filter curve  at the high and low extremes of the frequency spectrum     Using the Match EQ   Following is a common usage example that you can adapt to your own workflow  In this  example  the frequency spectrum of a mix is matched with the spectrum of a source  audio file     To learn or create a Match EQ template  Do one of the following     Drag an audio file from the finder onto the Template Learn button and select the source  channel strip as a sidechain  See below     Use the Match EQ on the source channel strip and save a setting  Import this setting into
18.  Formant Stretch and Formant Shift are also useful if the frequency spectrum of the  synthesis signal does not complement the frequency spectrum of the analysis signal  You  could create a synthesis signal in the high frequency range from an analysis signal that  mainly modulates the sound in a lower frequency range  for example     Note  The use of the Formant Stretch and the Formant Shift parameters can result in the  generation of unusual resonant frequencies  when high Resonance settings are used     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Modulation Parameters   The parameters in this section control the LFO  which can be used to modulate either  the frequency   the pitch   of the tracking oscillator  thus creating a vibrato  or the  Formant Shift parameter of the synthesis filter bank     Formant Stretch Formant Shift Resonance    Wave C  Intensity Rate J  LFO z      Shift Intensity slider  Controls the amount of formant shift modulation by the LFO          Pitch Intensity slider  Controls the amount of pitch modulation   vibrato   by the LFO     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 151    e Waveform buttons  Set the waveform type used by the LFO  You can choose between  triangle  falling and rising sawtooth  square up and down around zero  bipolar  good  for trills   square up from zero  unipolar  good for changing between two definable  pitches   a random stepped waveform  S amp H   and a smoothed random waveform for  each LFO     LFO Rate knob and field  Determines the speed of modulation  Valu
19.  In most mixes  you should set a lower level for  the low frequency reverb signal  This enables you to boost the bass level of the incoming  signal  making it sound punchier  This also helps to counteract bottom end masking  effects       High Cut slider and field  Frequencies above the set value are filtered from the reverb  signal  Uneven or absorbent surfaces   wallpaper  wood paneling  carpets  and so  on   tend to reflect lower frequencies better than higher frequencies  The High Cut  filter replicates this effect  If you set the High Cut filter so that it is wide open  maximum  value   the reverb will sound as if it is reflecting off stone or glass       Density slider and field  Controls the density of the diffuse reverb tail  Ordinarily you  want the signal to be as dense as possible  In rare instances  however  a high Density  value can color the sound  which you can fix by reducing the Density slider value   Conversely  if you select a Density value that is too low  the reverb tail will sound grainy     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects 223      Diffusion slider and field  Sets the diffusion of the reverb tail  High Diffusion values  represent a regular density  with few alterations in level  times  and panorama position  over the course of the diffuse reverb signal  Low Diffusion values result in the reflection  density becoming irregular and grainy  This also affects the stereo spectrum  As with  Density  find the best balance for the signal       Reverb Time slider and f
20.  Spectral Gate    Imaging Processors  Binaural Post Processing  Direction Mixer   Stereo Spread    Metering Tools   BPM Counter  Correlation Meter  Level Meter Plug in  MultiMeter  Surround MultiMeter  Tuner    Modulation Effects  Chorus Effect  Ensemble Effect  Flanger Effect  Microphaser  Modulation Delay  Phaser Effect  Ringshifter    Contents    Chapter 10    Chapter 11    Chapter 12    Chapter 13    Chapter 14    197  199  201  202    203  203  207  208    213  214  214  215  218    225    227  228  229  233  239  241  247    249  249    252  253  255    259  259  260  261  263  263    Rotor Cabinet Effect  Scanner Vibrato Effect  Spreader   Tremolo Effect    Pitch Effects   Pitch Correction Effect  Pitch Shifter II   Vocal Transformer    Reverb Effects   Plates  Digital Reverb Effects  and Convolution Reverb  AVerb   EnVerb   GoldVerb   PlatinumVerb   SilverVerb    Space Designer Convolution Reverb   Getting to Know the Space Designer Interface   Working with Space Designer s Impulse Response Parameters  Working with Space Designer   s Envelope and EQ Parameters  Working with Space Designer s Filter   Working with Space Designer   s Global Parameters  Automating Space Designer    Specialized Effects and Utilities  Denoiser   Enhance Timing   Exciter   Grooveshifter   Speech Enhancer   SubBass    Utilities and Tools  Down Mixer   Gain Plug in   1 0 Utility  Multichannel Gain  Test Oscillator    Contents    An Introduction to the Logic Pro  Effects    Preface    Logic Pro
21.  Spring    Resonant Spring Another 1960s style spring with a strong  slightly distorted  mid range emphasis    Boutique Spring A modernized version of the classic Vintage Spring with a richer  tone in the bass and mids    Sweet Reverb A smooth modern reverb with rich lows and restrained highs    Rich Reverb A bold  well balanced modern reverb    Warm Reverb A lush modern reverb with rich low mids and understated highs        Using Amp Designer s Tremolo and Vibrato Effects   Tremolo and vibrato are controlled by several switches and two knobs in the Effects  section found toward the right of the knobs section  Tremolo modulates the amplitude  or volume of the sound  and vibrato modulates the pitch     EFFECTS         On Off switch  Enables or disables the tremolo or vibrato effect     Trem Vib switch  Choose either tremolo or vibrato     Depth knob  Sets the intensity of the modulation  tremolo or vibrato        Speed knob  Sets the speed of the modulation in Hertz  Lower settings produce a  smooth  floating sound  Higher settings produce a rotor like effect     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 25    26      Sync Free switch  When the switch is set to Sync  the modulation speed is synchronized  with the host application tempo  The Speed knob lets you select different bar  beat   and musical note values  1 8  1 16  and so on  including triplet and dotted note values    When the switch is set to Free  the modulation speed can be set to any available value  with the Speed knob     Sett
22.  active   Usually it should be used for mixing and mastering previously recorded tracks  not while  recording          Input meters  to the left   Show the input levels in real time as the file or project plays   The Margin field shows the highest input level  You can reset the Margin field by clicking  it       Input Scale knob and field  Scales the input level  Scaling is useful for handling very  high level or low level input signals  It essentially squeezes the higher and lower signal  levels into a range that allows the Gain knob to work effectively  In general  the input  level should never exceed 0 dBFS  which can result in unwanted distortion       Gain knob and field  Sets the amount of gain after input scaling     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    87    88      Out Ceiling knob and field  Sets the maximum output level  or ceiling  The signal will  not rise above this       Output meters  to the right   Show output levels  allowing you to see the results of the  limiting process  The Margin field shows the highest output level  You can reset the  Margin field by clicking it     Mode buttons  Extended Parameters area   Choose the type of peak smoothing     OptFit  Limiting follows a linear curve  which allows signal peaks above 0 dB       NoOver  Avoids distortion artifacts from the output hardware by ensuring that the  signal does not exceed 0 cB       Lookahead field and slider  Extended Parameters area   Adjusts how far ahead the Adaptive  Limiter analyzes the file 
23.  an audible echo  begin materializing     Obviously  these guidelines are intended to help you design realistic sounding spaces  that are suitable for different signals  If you want to create unnatural sound stages or  otherworldly reverbs and echoes  feel free to experiment with the Pre Dly parameter     Using Space Designer   s IR Start Parameter  The IR Start parameter enables you to shift the playback start point of the impulse  response  which will effectively cut off the beginning of the impulse response     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    This can be useful for eliminating level peaks at the beginning of the impulse response  sample  Its use also affords a number of creative options  particularly when combined  with the Reverse function  See Using Space Designer s Button Bar     Note  The IR Start parameter is not available or required in Synthesized IR mode because   by design  the Length parameter provides identical functionality     Using Space Designer   s Spread Parameters   The Spread and Xover knobs enhance the perceived width of the signal  without losing  the directional information of the input signal normally found in the higher frequency  range  Low frequencies are spread to the sides  reducing the amount of low frequency  content in the center   allowing the reverb to nicely wrap around the mix  The Spread  and Xover knobs function only in Synthesized IR mode     Note  As these parameters adjust stereo or surround processing  they have no i
24.  and includes a set of parameters for each band        The Fat EQ offers the following parameters       Band Type buttons  Located above the graphic display  For bands 1 2 and 4 5  click  one of the paired buttons to select the EQ type for the corresponding band       Band 1  Click the highpass or low shelving button      Band 2  Click the low shelving or parametric button      Band 3  Always acts as a parametric EQ band      Band 4  Click the parametric or high shelving button      Band 5  Click the high shelving or lowpass button     Graphic display  Shows the EQ curve of each frequency band     Frequency fields  Sets the frequency for each band       Gain knobs  Set the amount of gain for each band     116 Chapter 5 Equalizers      Q fields  Sets the Q or bandwidth of each band   the range of frequencies around the  center frequency that are altered  At low Q factor values  the EQ covers a wider frequency  range  At high Q values  the effect of the EQ band is limited to a narrow frequency  range  The Q value can significantly influence how audible your changes are   if you re  working with a narrow frequency band  you ll generally need to cut or boost more  drastically to notice the difference     Note  For bands 1 and 5  this changes the slope of the filter     Band On Off buttons  Enables disables the corresponding band       Master Gain slider and field  Sets the overall output level of the signal  Use it after  boosting or cutting individual frequency bands     Linear 
25.  and use an external effects unit with the I O utility   Connect an output  or output pair  of your audio interface with the input  pair  on your  effects unit  Connect the output  or output pair  of your effects unit with an input  pair   on your audio interface     Note  These can be either analog or digital connections if your audio interface and effects  unit are equipped with either  or both     Click an Insert slot of an aux channel strip  being used as a bus send return   and choose  Utility  gt  I O     In the I O window  choose both the Outputs and Inputs of your audio hardware  that  your effects unit is connected to      Route the signals of any channel strips that you want to process to the bus  aux channel  strip  chosen in step 3  and set appropriate Send levels     Adjust the Input or Output volume as required in the I O window   Click the Latency Detection  Ping  button if you want to detect  and compensate for  any  delay between the selected output and input     When you start playback  the signals of any channel strips routed to the aux channel   chosen in step 3  will be processed by the external effects unit     Chapter 14 Utilities and Tools    Multichannel Gain  Multichannel Gain allows you to independently control the gain  and phase  of each  channel in a surround mix        e Master slider and field  Sets the master gain for the combined channel output     Channel gain sliders and fields  Set the amount of gain for the respective channel   e Phase In
26.  at the  beginning and end of the sine sweep     Sweep Mode pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Choose Linear or Logarithmic   sweep curve      Trigger button and pop up menu  Click the Trigger button to trigger the sine sweep   Choose the behavior of the Trigger button in the pop up menu       Single  Triggers the sweep once       Continuous  Triggers the sweep indefinitely     Level slider and field  Determines the overall output level of the Test Oscillator     Chapter 14 Utilities and Tools    
27.  bands  Each frequency band represents one third  of an octave  The Analyzer parameters are used to activate Analyzer mode  and to  customize the way that the incoming signal is shown in the main display     aM ator sd Mono    Goniometer             Analyzer parameters Scale      Analyzer button  Switches the main display to Analyzer mode       Left  Right  LRmax  and Mono buttons  Determine which channels are displayed in the  Analyzer results  in the main display       Left or Right  Displays the left or right channels     LRmax  Displays the maximum level of the stereo inputs   e Mono  Displays the spectrum of the mono sum of both  stereo  inputs       View fields  Alter the way that values are shown in the Analyzer by setting the maximum  level displayed  Top  and the overall dynamic range  Range        Mode buttons  Determine how levels are displayed  You can choose from Peak  Slow  RMS  or Fast RMS characteristics       The two RMS modes show the effective signal average  and provide a representative  overview of perceived volume levels       The Peak mode shows level peaks accurately       Scale  shown in main display   Indicates the scale of levels  Adjusting the scale is useful  when analyzing highly compressed material  as it makes it easier to identify small level  differences  Drag vertically on the scale to adjust     Chapter 8 Metering Tools 171    172    Using the MultiMeter Goniometer   A goniometer helps you to judge the coherence of the stereo image and dete
28.  be 48 kHz  24 kHz  and 12 kHz     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 231    232      If the project sample rate is 44 1 kHz  the options will be 22 05 kHz  11 025 kHz  and  5512 5 Hz     Changing the sample rate upward increases   or changing it downward decreases   the  frequency response  and length  of the impulse response  and to a degree the overall  sound quality of the reverb  Upward sample rate changes are of benefit only if the original  IR sample actually contains higher frequencies  When you are reducing the sample rate   use your ears to decide if the sonic quality meets your needs     Note  Natural room surfaces    except concrete and tiles   tend to have minimal reflections  in the higher frequency ranges  making the half rate and full rate IRs sound almost  identical     When you select half the sample rate  the impulse response becomes twice as long  The  highest frequency that can be reverberated will be halved  This results in a behavior that  is much like doubling every dimension of a virtual room   multiplying a room s volume  by eight     Another benefit of reducing the sample rate is that processing requirements drop  significantly  making half sample rate settings useful for large  open spaces     Activating the    preserve length    button preserves the length of the impulse response  when the sample rate is changed  Manipulating these two parameters as you see fit can  lead to interesting results     The lower sample rates can also be used 
29.  below the graphic display     Template  Displays the learned frequency curve template for the source file  This is  shown in red     Current Material  Displays the frequency curve for the audio learned as current  material  This is shown in green     Filter  Displays the filter curve created by matching the template and the current  material  This is shown in yellow     View button  Determines if separate curves are displayed by the Analyzer  L amp R for stereo   All Cha for surround  or the summed maximum level is shown  LR Max for stereo  Cha  Max for surround      Note  The View parameters are disabled when using the effect on a mono channel     Select buttons  Determines if changes made to the filter curve  created by matching  the template with the current material  are applied to the left channel  L   the right  channel  R   or both channels  L R      Note  The Select parameters are disabled when using the effect on a mono channel     Chapter 5 Equalizers      Select menu  Surround instances only   The Select buttons are replaced by the Select  menu  enabling you to choose an individual channel or all channels  Changes to the  filter curve will affect the chosen channel when a single channel is selected       Channel Link slider and field  Refines the settings made with the Select buttons or Select  menu       When set to 100   all channels  L and R for stereo  or all surround channels  are  represented by a common EQ curve       When set to 0   a separate filter curve
30.  contains a variety of advanced filter based effects that you can use to creatively  modify your audio  These effects are most often used to radically alter the frequency  spectrum of a sound or mix     Note  Equalizers  EQs  are special types of filters  Typically  they are not used as    effects     per se  but as tools to refine the frequency spectrum of a sound or mix  See Equalizers   This chapter covers the following    e AutoFilter  p  131    e EVOC 20 Filterbank  p  137    e EVOC 20 TrackOscillator  p  141    e Fuzz Wah  p  153    e Spectral Gate  p  157     AutoFilter  The AutoFilter is a versatile filter effect with several unique features  You can use it to  create classic  analog style synthesizer effects  or as a tool for creative sound design     The effect works by analyzing incoming signal levels through use of a threshold parameter   Any signal level that exceeds the threshold is used as a trigger for a synthesizer style  ADSR envelope or an LFO  low frequency oscillator   These control sources are used to  dynamically modulate the filter cutoff     The AutoFilter allows you to choose between different filter types and slopes  control the  amount of resonance  add distortion for more aggressive sounds  and mix the original   dry signal with the processed signal     131       132    Getting to Know the AutoFilter Interface  The main areas of the AutoFilter window are the Threshold  Envelope  LFO  Filter  Distortion   and Output parameter sections     Threshold
31.  determines  the sample rate of the loaded impulse response  Activate the    preserve length    button  to preserve the length of the impulse response when changing the sample rate  See  Setting Space Designer s IR Sample Rate     Length field  Adjusts the length of the impulse response  See Setting Impulse Response  Lengths in Space Designer     Synthesized IR button  Click to activate Synthesized IR mode  A new synthesized impulse  response is generated  This is derived from the values of the Length  envelope  Filter   EQ  and Spread parameters  See Working in Space Designer s Synthesized IR Mode     Note  You may freely switch between a loaded impulse response sample and a synthesized  impulse response without losing the settings of the other  For more information  see  Working in Space Designer s Synthesized IR Mode     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 229    230    Important  To convolve audio in real time  Space Designer must first calculate any  parameter adjustments to the impulse response  This requires a moment or two  following  parameter edits  and is indicated by a blue progress bar  During this parameter edit  processing time you can continue to adjust the parameter  When calculation starts  the  blue bar is replaced by a red bar  advising you that calculation is taking place          nple rate iple rate          preserve length    preserve length    Working in Space Designer s IR Sample Mode   In IR Sample mode  Space Designer loads and uses an impu
32.  distortion  They are great for clean toned rock  vintage R  amp  B  surf music  twangy country   jazz  or any other style where strong note definition is essential     Model Description    Large Blackface Combo A 4x 10  combo with a sweet  well balanced tone favored by rock   surf  and R  amp  B players  Great for lush  reverb drenched chords or  strident solos        Silverface Combo A 2x 12  combo with a loud  ultra clean tone  Its percussive   articulate attack is great for funk  R  amp  B  and intricate chord work  It  can be crunchy when overdriven  but most players favor it for clean          tones    Mini Blackface Combo A1x10  combo that is bright and open sounding  with a surprising  amount of low end impact  It excels at clean tones with just a hint  of overdrive    Small Brownface Combo A 1 x 12  combo that is smooth and rich sounding  but retains a    nice level of detail        Blues Blaster Combo A 1 x 15  combo that has a clear top end with a tight  defined low  end  This model is favored by blues and rock players        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Tip  While these amps tend toward a clean and tight sound  you can use a Pedalboard  distortion stompbox to attain hard edged crunch sounds with a biting treble and extended  low end definition  See Distortion Pedals and Pedalboard     British Stacks   The British Stack models are based on the 50  and 100 watt amplifier heads that have  largely defined the sound of heavy rock  especially when paired with their sign
33.  effect pedals are moved to the left and are inserted into Bus A     Note  A Mixer pedal cannot be moved to a position directly after  or to the left of  a  corresponding split point or Splitter utility    To change a Splitter utility position in the Pedal area   Drag the Splitter utility to a new position  either to the right or the left     When moved to the left  The split between Bus A and B will occur at the earlier insertion  point  Relevant effect pedals are moved to the right and are inserted into Bus A     When moved to the right  The split between Bus A and B will occur at the later insertion  point  Relevant effect pedals are moved to the left and are inserted into Bus A     Note  A Splitter pedal cannot be moved to a position directly preceding  or to the right  of  a corresponding Mixer utility    To replace a pedal in the Pedal area   Do one of the following     Drag the stompbox from the Pedal Browser directly over the pedal you want to replace  in the Pedal area     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Click to select the stompbox you want to replace in the Pedal area  then double click the  appropriate pedal in the Pedal Browser     Note  You can only replace    effect    pedals  not the Mixer or Splitter utilities  Bus routings   if active  are not changed when an effect pedal is replaced     To remove a pedal from the Pedal area  Do one of the following       Drag the pedal out of the Pedal area     Click the pedal to select it and press the Delete key     Using 
34.  has an extensive range of digital signal processing  DSP  effects and processors  that are used to color or tonally shape existing audio recordings  software instruments   and external audio sources   in real time  These cover almost every audio processing and  manipulation need you will encounter in your day to day work     The most common processing options include EQs  dynamic processors  modulations   distortions  reverbs  and delays     Less common are simulations of amplifiers and speaker cabinets  which enable you to      play    your instruments or other signals through a range of vintage and modern sound  reproduction systems  Guitarists and keyboard players will also benefit from a number  of classic pedal effect emulations     Further advanced features include precise signal meters and analyzers  a test tone  generator  noise reduction  pitch correction  imaging  bass enhancement  and time altering  processors and utilities     As you can see  many of the included processors and utilities don   t really fall into the     effects    category  but they may prove to be invaluable in your studio    This preface covers the following    e About the Logic Pro Effects  p  7    e About the Logic Pro Documentation  p  8    e Additional Resources  p  8     About the Logic Pro Effects   All effects  processors  and utilities provide an intuitive interface that simplifies operation   enabling you to work quickly  Outstanding audio quality is assured when needed  or   at  the o
35.  internal filter circuit that allows more low   Lo  or high  Hi  frequency content to be heard  You can also disable  this filter circuit by choosing Off        Spring Box A spring reverb pedal  Time sets the length of the reverberation to  short  medium  or long values  Tone controls the cutoff frequency   making the effect brighter or darker  Style switches between  algorithms  each with different characteristics  You can choose  from  Boutique  Simple  Vintage  Bright  and Resonant  Mix sets the  ratio between the source and effect signals        Tru Tape Delay A vintage tape delay effect  The Norm Reverse switch changes the  delay playback direction  Reverse mode is indicated by a blue LED  and Normal mode is indicated by a red LED  Hi Cut and Lo Cut  activate a fixed frequency filter  Dirt sets the amount of input signal  gain  which can introduce an overdriven  saturated quality  Flutter  emulates speed fluctuations in the tape transport mechanism  Time  sets the modulation speed and can run freely  or be synchronized  with the host application tempo by enabling the Sync button  When  synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and note values  including  triplets and dotted notes   Feedback determines the amount of the  effect signal that is routed back into the input  The buildup of  repeating signals can be used creatively for dub delay and other  effects by adjusting Feedback in real time  Mix sets the balance  between the source and effect signals     Filter Pedals  Th
36.  is activated  you can change the scaling with the Analyzer Top  parameter  on the right side of the graphic display  The visible area represents a dynamic  range of 60 dB  Drag vertically to set the maximum value to anywhere between  20 dB  and    40 dB  The Analyzer display is always dB linear     Note  When choosing a resolution  be aware that higher resolutions require significantly  more processing power  High resolution is necessary when trying to obtain accurate  analysis of very low bass frequencies  for example  It is recommended that you disable  the Analyzer or close the Linear Phase EQ window after setting the appropriate   EQ parameters  This will free up CPU resources for other tasks     Match EQ    The Match EQ allows you to store the average frequency spectrum of an audio file as a  template and apply the template to another audio signal so that it matches the spectrum  of the original file  This is also known as a fingerprint EQ  where one sonic fingerprint is  applied to another signal     The Match EQ enables you to acoustically match the tonal quality or overall sound of  different songs you plan to include on an album  for example  or to impart the color of  any source recording to your own projects     Match EQ is a learning equalizer that analyzes the frequency spectrum of an audio signal  such as an audio file  a channel strip input signal  or a template  The average frequency  spectrum of the source file  the template  and of the current material  thi
37.  is displayed for each channel  Use the Select  buttons or Select menu to choose each channel       Settings between 0 and 100  allow you to blend these values with your filter curve  changes for each channel  This results in a hybrid curve     Note  The Channel Link parameters are disabled when using the effect on a mono  channel       LFE Handling buttons  Extended Parameters area   In surround instances  allow you to  process or bypass the LFE channel     Match EQ Display  Learn  and Match Parameters    Graphic display  Displays the filter curve created by oe the o to the  current material  You can edit the filter curve  see Editing the Match EQ Filte ve        Template Learn button  Click to start the process of learning the frequency spectrum  of the source file  Click again to stop the learning process       Current Material Learn button  Click to start the process of learning the frequency  spectrum of the project you want to match the source file  Click again to stop the  learning process       Current Material Match button  Matches the frequency spectrum of the current material  to that of the template  source  file    Match EQ Processing Parameters   e Phase pop up menu  Switches the operational principle of the filter curve       Linear prevents processing from altering the signal phase  but the latency of the  plug in is increased     e Minimal alters the signal phase  minimally   but latency is reduced     e Minimal  Zero Latency adds no latency  but has a higher
38.  is shown in both directions  A vertical red line to the left of the correlation  indicator shows the maximum negative phase deviation value  You can reset this line by  clicking on it during playback     The LFE Correlation Meter s scale values indicate the following       A  1 correlation value indicates that the signal is balanced       Correlation values in the blue zone  between  1 and the middle position  indicate that  the signal is mono compatible       The middle position indicates the highest allowable amount of channel divergence       When the meter moves into the red area to the left of the center position  out of balance  material is present     Surround MultiMeter Peak Parameters  The Surround MultiMeter offers the following Peak parameters          Hold button  Activates peak hold for all metering tools in the Surround MultiMeter  as  follows       Analyzer  A small yellow segment above each level bar indicates the most recent  peak level       Goniometer  All illuminated pixels are held during a peak hold       Level Meter  A small yellow segment above each level bar indicates the most recent  peak level       Balance Correlation Meter  The horizontal area around the white correlation indicator  denotes phase correlation deviations in real time  in both directions     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    179    180    Note  This meter must be manually opened by clicking on the Balance Correlation  button       Hold Time pop up menu  When peak hold is active  sets the 
39.  of a room   s  reverb characteristics   or  to be more precise  a recording of all reflections in a given  room  following an initial signal spike  The actual impulse response file is a standard audio  file     To understand how this works  imagine a situation where Space Designer is used ona  vocal track  An IR recorded in an actual opera house is loaded into Space Designer  This  IR is convolved with your vocal track  placing the singer inside the opera house     Convolution can be used to place your audio signal inside any space  including a speaker  cabinet  a plastic toy  a cardboard box  and so on  All you need is an IR recording of the  space     In addition to loading impulse responses  Space Designer includes an on board impulse  response synthesis facility  This enables you to create completely unique effects  particularly  when the synthesized IR doesn   t represent a real space     You can also record and edit impulse responses with Impulse Response Utility  which is  accessed from Space Designer s IR Sample menu     Space Designer also offers features such as envelopes  filters  EQ  and stereo surround  balance controls  which provide precise control over the dynamics  timbre  and length  of the reverberation     Space Designer can operate as a mono  stereo  true stereo  meaning each channel is  processed discretely   or surround effect    This chapter covers the following      Getting to Know the Space Designer Interface  p  228    e Working with Space Designer
40.  on  using the Amp  Cabinet  and Mic pop up menus  located  on the black bar at the bottom of the interface  The EQ pop up menu is accessed by  clicking the word EQ or Custom EQ toward the left of the knobs section     Note  If you create your own hybrid amp combo  you can use the Settings menu to save  it as a setting file  which also includes any parameter changes you may have made     EQ pop up menu       Amp pop up menu Cabinet pop up menu    Model pop up menu Mic pop up menu    Building an Amp Designer model is described in the following sections   e Choosing an Amp Designer Amplifier   e Choosing an Amp Designer Cabinet   e Using Amp Designer   s Equalizer    e Setting Amp Designer Microphone Parameters    Choosing an Amp Designer Amplifier   You can choose an amplifier model from the Amp pop up menu on the black bar at the  bottom of the Amp Designer interface  See the following sections for details on the  characteristics of each amplifier in these categories       Tweed Combos     Classic American Combos  e British Stacks     British Combos   e British Alternatives    e Metal Stacks    Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Choosing an Amp Designer Cabinet   Cabinets have a en impact on the character of a guitar sound  see Amp Designer  Cabinet Reference Table   While certain amplifier and cabinet pairings ve been popular  for decades  pa from them is an effective way to create fresh sounding tones  For  example  most players automatically associate British heads with 4 x 12  
41.  panner  allowing you to determine  the surround position of each tap     Note  In the Tap display   s Pan view mode  you can only adjust the angle of taps  You must  use the surround panner on the Tap Parameter bar to adjust diversity     flip   x      mute level  HASH   e J  NAPS A          M   4 2dB  gt                         To easily move the surround position  you can      Command drag to adjust diversity      Command Option drag to adjust the angle      Option click the blue dot to reset the angle and diversity    Note  Delay Designer generates separate automation data for stereo pan and surround    pan operations  This means that when you use it in surround channels  it will not react  to existing stereo pan automation data  and vice versa     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    72       Echo    This simple echo effect always synchronizes the delay time to the project tempo  allowing  you to quickly create echo effects that run in time with your composition      x  Audio 1    p View v ShowCS   Show insert      Bypass  lt   gt   default    Echo      Time pop up menu  Sets the grid resolution of the delay time in musical note durations   based on the project tempo        T    values represent triplets          values represent dotted notes      Repeat slider and field  Determines how often the delay effect is repeated      Color slider and field  Sets the harmonic content  color  of the delay signal       Dry and Wet sliders and fields  Control the amount of original and effect
42.  parameter Envelope parameters Filter parameters    Output parameters       LFO parameters Distortion parameters      Threshold parameter  Sets an input level that   if exceeded   triggers the envelope or  LFO  which are used to dynamically modulate the filter cutoff frequency  See AutoFilter  Threshold Parameter       Envelope parameters  Define how the filter cutoff frequency is modulated over time   See AutoFilter Envelope Parameters       LFO parameters  Define how the filter cutoff frequency is modulated by the LFO  See  AutoFilter LFO Parameters       Filter parameters  Control the tonal color of the filtered sound  See AutoFilter Filter  Parameters       Distortion parameters  Distort the signal both before and after the filter  See AutoFilter  Distortion Parameters       Output parameters  Set the level of both the dry and effect signal  See AutoFilter Output  Parameters     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    AutoFilter Threshold Parameter   The Threshold parameter analyzes the level of the input signal  If the input signal level  exceeds the set threshold level  the envelope and LFO are retriggered   this applies only  if the Retrigger button is active        The envelope and LFO can be used to modulate the filter cutoff frequency     AutoFilter Envelope Parameters  The envelope is used to shape the filter cutoff over time  When the input signal exceeds  the set threshold level  the envelope is triggered        Attack knob and field  Sets the attack time for the envelope   
43.  ratio between the original  dry  and effect signals       Formant knob and field  Shifts the formants of the input signal  See Setting Vocal  Transformer Pitch and Formant Parameters       Glide slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Determines the amount of time the  vocal transformation takes  allowing sliding transitions to the set Pitch value       Grain Size slider and field  Extended Parameters area   The Vocal Transformer effect  algorithm is based on granular synthesis  The Grain Size parameter allows you to set  the size of the grains  and thus affect the precision of the process  Experiment to find  the best setting  Try Auto first       Formants pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Determines whether the Vocal  Transformer processes all formants     Process always    setting   or only the voiced ones      Keep Unvoiced Formants    setting   The    Keep Unvoiced Formants    option leaves  sibilant sounds in a vocal performance untouched  This setting will produce a more  natural sounding transformation effect with some signals       Detune slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Detunes the input signal by the set  value  This parameter is of particular benefit when automated     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects 209    210    Setting Vocal Transformer Pitch and Formant Parameters   Use the Vocal Transformer s Pitch parameter to transpose the pitch of the signal upward  or downward  Adjustments are made in semitone steps  Incoming pitches are indicated  by a v
44.  release settings   and because the maximum volume is reached more swiftly     In addition  compression can make a project sound better when played back in different  audio environments  For example  the speakers of a television set or in a car typically  have a narrower dynamic range than the sound system in a cinema  Compressing the  overall mix can help make the sound fuller and clearer in lower fidelity playback  situations     Compressors are typically used on vocal tracks to make the singing prominent in an  overall mix  They are also commonly used on music and sound effect tracks  but they  are rarely used on ambience tracks     Some compressors   multiband compressors   can divide the incoming signal into  different frequency bands and apply different compression settings to each band  This  helps to achieve the maximum level without introducing compression artifacts   Multiband compression is typically used on an overall mix       Expanders  Expanders are similar to compressors  except that they raise  rather than  lower  the signal when it exceeds the threshold  Expanders are used to add life to audio  signals       Limiters  Limiters   also called peak limiters   work in a similar way to compressors in  that they reduce the audio signal when it exceeds a set threshold  The difference is  that whereas a compressor gradually lowers signal levels that exceed the threshold  a  limiter quickly reduces any signal that is louder than the threshold  to the threshold  level
45.  s   M   1008                   Delay                Tap pads Tap parameter bar      Main display  Provides a graphic representation of all taps  You can see  and edit  the  parameters of each tap in this area  See Getting to Know Delay Designer s Main Display     Chapter 2 Delay Effects      Tap parameter bar  Offers a numeric overview of the current parameter settings for the  selected tap  You can view and edit the parameters of each tap in this area  See Editing  Taps in Delay Designer   s Tap Parameter Bar       Tap pads  You can use these two pads to create taps in Delay Designer  See Creating  Taps in Delay Designer    e Sync section  You can set all Delay Designer synchronization and quantization parameters  in this section  See Synchronizing Taps in Delay Designer       Master section  This area contains the global Mix and Feedback parameters  See Using  Delay Designer s Master Section     Getting to Know Delay Designer s Main Display  Delay Designer s main display is used to view and edit tap parameters  You can freely  determine the parameter shown  and quickly zoom or navigate through all taps     Toggle buttons    Tap display View buttons Autozoom button                   Identification bar Overview display      View buttons  Determine the parameter or parameters represented in the Tap display   See Using Delay Designer s View Buttons       Autozoom button  Zooms the Tap display out  making all taps visible  Turn Autozoom  off if you want to zoom the display in  
46.  s Impulse Response Parameters  p  229     e Working with Space Designer s Envelope and EQ Parameters  p  233     227       228    e Working with Space Designer   s Filter  p  239   e Working with Space Designer   s Global Parameters  p  241   e Automating Space Designer  p  247     Getting to Know the Space Designer Interface  The Space Designer interface consists of the following main sections     Impulse response  parameters    Envelope and EQ  Parameters Main display Button bar    Input    IR Sample    sample rate  Saris ix    Global parameters       i om vatcompensation     lt Gefinition  100      20s a ess Global parameters    Reverb Spread          Uolume Envelope    Init laval attack time decay time anp lin vendileval             er s 002s   1988s       o  o           Filter parameters Parameter bar    Impulse response parameters  Used to load  save  or manipulate  recorded or synthesized   impulse response files  The chosen IR file determines what Space Designer will use to  convolve with your audio signal  See Working with Space Designer s Impulse Response  Parameters    Envelope and EQ parameters  Use the view buttons in the button bar to switch the main  display and parameter bar between envelope and EQ views  Use the main display to  edit the displayed parameters graphically  and use the parameter bar to edit them  numerically  See Working with Space Designer   s Envelope and EQ Parameters     Filter parameters  Used to modify the timbre of the Space Designer rev
47.  signal     Sample Delay  Sample Delay is more a utility than an effect   you can use it to delay a channel by single  sample values     When used in conjunction with the phase inversion capabilities of the Gain effect  Sample  Delay is useful for correction of timing problems that may occur with multichannel  microphones  It can also be used creatively  to emulate stereo microphone channel  separation     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Every sample at a frequency of 44 1 kHz is equivalent to the time taken for a sound wave  to travel 7 76 millimeters  If you delay one channel of a stereo microphone by 13 samples   this will emulate an acoustic  microphone  separation of 10 centimeters     tx  Inst 1    g View   Show Channel Strip   Show insert v    Bypass  lt   gt   default    Sample Delay    Delay L 0 sam    0 sam    LinkL amp R  m         Delay slider and field  L and R in stereo version   Determines the number of samples that  the incoming signal will be delayed by       Link L amp R button  only in stereo version   Ensures that the number of samples is identical  for both channels  Adjusting one channel value will adjust the other     Stereo Delay   The Stereo Delay works much like the Tape Delay  see Tape Delay   but allows you to set  the Delay  Feedback  and Mix parameters separately for the left and right channels  The  Crossfeed knob for each stereo side determines the feedback intensity or the level at  which each signal is routed to the opposite stereo side  You can f
48.  signal  If the signal clips  the Limiter reduces the level before  clipping can occur  The Limiter cannot  however  fix audio that is clipped during recording          Gain reduction meter  Shows the amount of limiting in real time     Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of gain applied to the input signal       Lookahead slider and field  Adjusts how far ahead in milliseconds the Limiter analyzes  the audio signal  This enables it to react earlier to peak volumes by adjusting the amount  of reduction     Note  Lookahead causes latency  but this has no perceptible effect when you use the  Limiter as a mastering effect on prerecorded material  Set it to higher values if you  want the limiting effect to occur before the maximum level is reached  thus creating  a smoother transition       Release slider and field  Sets the amount of time  after the signal falls below the threshold  level  before the Limiter stops processing       Output Level knob and field  Sets the output level of the signal       Softknee button  When active  the signal is limited only when it reaches the threshold   The transition to full limiting is nonlinear  producing a softer  less abrupt effect  and  reducing distortion artifacts that can be produced by hard limiting     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    100    Multipressor   The Multipressor  an abbreviation for multiband compressor  is an extremely versatile  audio mastering tool  It splits the incoming signal into different frequency bands   up to
49.  signal  These added harmonics contain frequencies  at least one octave above the threshold of the highpass filter  The distorted signal is then  mixed with the original  dry signal     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities    You can use the Exciter to add life to recordings  It is especially well suited to audio tracks  with a weak treble frequency range  The Exciter is also useful as a general tool for  enhancing guitar tracks          Frequency display  Shows the frequency range used as the source signal for the excite  process       Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency  in Hertz  of the highpass filter  The  input signal passes through the filter before  harmonic  distortion is introduced       Input button  When the Input button is active  the original  pre effect  signal is mixed  with the effect signal  If you disable Input  only the effect signal is heard       Harmonics knob and field  Sets the ratio between the effect and original signals   expressed as a percentage  If the Input button is turned off  this parameter has no  effect     Note  In most cases  higher Frequency and Harmonics values are preferable  because  human ears cannot easily distinguish between the artificial and original high frequencies     Color 1 and Color 2 buttons  Color 1 generates a less dense harmonic distortion spectrum     Color 2 generates a more intense harmonic distortion  Color 2 also introduces more   unwanted  intermodulation distortions     Grooveshifter   
50.  signal falls  below the threshold     Release knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to reach maximum attenuation  after the signal falls below the threshold     Hysteresis slider and field  Sets the difference  in decibels  between the threshold values  that open and close the gate  This prevents the gate from rapidly opening and closing  when the input signal is close to the threshold     Lookahead slider and field  Sets how far ahead the Noise Gate analyzes the incoming  signal  allowing the effect to respond more quickly to peak levels     Monitor button  Enable to hear the side chain signal  including the effect of the High Cut  and Low Cut filters     High Cut slider and field  Sets the upper cutoff frequency for the side chain signal   Low Cut slider and field  Sets the lower cutoff frequency for the side chain signal     Note  When no external side chain is selected  the input signal is used as the side chain     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Using the Noise Gate   In most situations  setting the Reduction slider to the lowest possible value ensures that  sounds below the Threshold value are completely suppressed  Setting Reduction to a  higher value attenuates low level sounds but still allows them to pass  You can also use  Reduction to boost the signal by up to 20 dB  which is useful for ducking effects     The Attack  Hold  and Release knobs modify the dynamic response of the Noise Gate  If  you want the gate to open extremely quickly  for percussive
51.  signals such as drums  set  the Attack knob to a lower value  For sounds with a slow attack phase  such as string  pads  set Attack to a higher value  Similarly  when working with signals that fade out  gradually or that have longer reverb tails  set a higher Release knob value that allows the  signal to fade out naturally     The Hold knob determines the minimum amount of time that the gate stays open  You  can use the Hold knob to prevent abrupt level changes   known as chattering   caused  by rapid opening or closing of the gate     The Hysteresis slider provides another option for preventing chattering  without needing  to define a minimum Hold time  Use it to set the range between the threshold values  that open and close the Noise Gate  This is useful when the signal level hovers around  the Threshold level  causing the Noise Gate to switch on and off repeatedly  producing  the undesirable chattering effect  The Hysteresis slider essentially sets the Noise Gate to  open at the Threshold level and remain open until the level drops below another  lower   level  As long as the difference between these two values is large enough to accommodate  the fluctuating level of the incoming signal  the Noise Gate can function without creating  chatter  This value is always negative  Generally     6 dB is a good place to start     In some situations  you may find that the level of the signal you want to keep and the  level of the noise signal are close  making it difficult to separa
52.  softer tone     e Type pop up menu  Choose the type of distortion you want to apply       Growl  Emulates a two stage tube amplifier similar to the type found in a Leslie 122  speaker cabinet  which is often used with the Hammond B3 organ       Bity  Emulates the sound of a bluesy  overdriven  guitar amp       Nasty  Produces hard distortion  suitable for creating very aggressive sounds     Overdrive   Overdrive emulates the distortion produced by a field effect transistor  FET   which is  commonly used in solid state musical instrument amplifiers and hardware effects devices   When saturated  FETs generate a warmer sounding distortion than bipolar transistors   such as those emulated by the Distortion effect          Drive slider and field  Sets the saturation amount for the simulated transistor     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects 81    82    Display  Shows the impact of parameters on the signal     Tone knob and field  Sets the frequency for the high cut filter  Filtering the harmonically  rich distorted signal produces a softer tone     Output slider and field  Sets the output level  This allows you to compensate for increases  in loudness caused by using Overdrive     Phase Distortion   The Phase Distortion effect is based on a modulated delay line  similar to a chorus or  flanger effect  see Modulation Effects   Unlike these effects  however  the delay time is  not modulated by a low frequency oscillator  LFO   but rather by a lowpass filtered version  of the input signal 
53.  sound  As  always  rely on your ears     I O Utility    The I O utility enables the use of external audio effects units  similar to the use of effects  included with Logic Pro     Note  In practical terms  this makes sense only if you are using an audio interface that  provides discrete inputs and outputs  analog or digital  that are used to send signals to  and from the external audio effects unit      x  Aux 1    p    View   Show Channel Strip   Show insert v  Bypass  Output Volume 0 dB    Output         Input    Input Volume    Latency Detection    Latency Oftset         Output Volume field and slider  Adjusts the level of the output signal       Output pop up menu  Assigns the respective output  or output pair  of your audio  hardware       Input pop up menu  Assigns the respective input  or input pair  of your audio hardware     Note  The Input pop up menu is only visible when an audio interface with multiple  inputs is active       Input Volume field and slider  Adjusts the level of the input signal       Latency Detection  Ping  button  Detects the delay between the selected output and  input  and compensates the delay accordingly     Chapter 14 Utilities and Tools 261    262    Note  Bypassing any latency inducing plug ins on the track will provide you with the  most accurate reading       Latency Offset field and slider  Displays the value for the detected latency between the  selected output and input  Also allows you to offset the latency manually     To integrate
54.  than most classic  Wah Wah pedals     The sweep range of the Wah Wah filter is set with the Pedal Range parameters  The highest  and lowest possible values reached by a MIDI foot pedal are graphically represented by  a gray bracket around the Pedal Position slider  the slider represents the current position  of the Wah Wah pedal      Chapter 6 Filter Effects    You can set the upper and lower limits of the range independently by dragging the left  and right handles of the slider bracket  You can move the entire range by dragging the  center section of the slider bracket     Spectral Gate  The Spectral Gate is an unusual filter effect that can be used as a tool for creative sound  design     It works by dividing the incoming signal into two frequency ranges   above and below  acentral frequency band that you specify with the Center Freq and Bandwidth parameters   The signal ranges above and below the defined band can be individually processed with  the Low Level and High Level parameters and the Super Energy and Sub Energy  parameters  See Using the Spectral Gate     Spectral Gate Parameters  The Spectral Gate panel includes the following parameters     Threshold slider    Speed  CF Modulation   and BW Modulation Super Energy and High  sliders Graphic display Level controls    Gain slider       Center Freq  and Sub Energy and Low  Bandwidth knobs Level controls    Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level for division of frequency ranges  When  the threshold is exc
55.  that carry multichannel audio     You can adjust the compression ratio  knee  attack  and release for the main  side  surround   and LFE channels  depending on the chosen surround format  All channels include an  integrated limiter and provide independent threshold and output level controls     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 107    108    You can link channels by assigning them to one of three groups  When you adjust the  threshold or output parameter of any grouped channel  the parameter adjustment is  mirrored by all channels assigned to the group     Link section       Main section LFE section    The Surround Compressor is divided into three sections     e The Link section at the top contains a series of menus where you assign each channel  to a group  See Surround Compressor Link Parameters      The Main section includes controls common to all the main channels  and the threshold  and output controls for each channel  See Surround Compressor Main Parameters       The LFE section on the lower right includes separate controls for the LFE channel  See  Surround Compressor LFE Parameters     Surround Compressor Link Parameters  The Surround Compressor   s Link section provides the following parameters          Circuit Type pop up menu  Choose the type of circuit emulated by the Compressor  The  choices are Platinum  Classic A_R  Classic A_U  VCA  FET  and Opto  optical      Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors      Grp   Group  pop up menus  Set group membership for each channel  A 
56.  the Speech Enhancer effect with other microphones  but microphone  correction models are offered only for built in Macintosh microphones and iSight   Should a non Apple microphone be used  you will achieve the best results if Mic  Correction is set to Generic       Voice Enhance button and Enhance Mode pop up menu  This button turns on the Speech  Enhancer multiband compression circuit  When it is active  you can choose from four  settings that make the recorded voice louder and more intelligible  Choose the setting  that best matches your recording situation        Female or Male  Solo  Use when the recorded signal consists of a vocal only        Female or Male  Voice Over  Use when the recorded signal contains both a vocal  performance and a musical or atmospheric bed     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities 255    256    SubBass    The SubBass plug in generates frequencies below those of the original signal  resulting  in artificial bass content     The simplest use for the SubBass is as an octave divider  similar to octaver effect pedals  for electric bass guitars  Whereas such pedals can only process a monophonic input sound  source of clearly defined pitch  SubBass can be used with complex summed signals as  well  See Using SubBass     SubBass creates two bass signals  derived from two separate portions of the incoming  signal  These are defined with the High and Low parameters  See SubBass Parameters        Warning  Using SubBass can produce extremely loud out
57.  used     Working in Space Designer s Synthesized IR Mode   In Synthesized IR mode  Space Designer generates a synthesized impulse response based  on the values of the Length  envelope  Filter  EQ  and Spread parameters  To switch to  this mode  click the Synthesized IR button in the Impulse Response Parameters section        Repeated clicks of the activated Synthesized IR button will randomly generate new impulse  responses with slightly different reflection patterns  The current impulse response state   including parameter and other values that represent the reflection patterns and  characteristics of the synthetic IR  is saved with the setting file     Note  Clicking the Synthesized IR button while you are in IR Sample mode will switch you  back to the synthesized IR stored with the setting     Setting Space Designer   s IR Sample Rate  The    sample rate    slider determines the sample rate of an impulse response         eo IR Sample    sample rate      Orig  Space Designer uses the current project sample rate  When loading an impulse  response  Space Designer automatically converts the sample rate of the impulse  response to match the current project sample rate  if necessary  For example  this allows  you to load a 44 1 kHz impulse response into a project running at 96 kHz  and vice  versa        2  4  8  These settings are half divisions of the preceding value   one half  one quarter   one eighth  For example       If the project sample rate is 96 kHz  the options will
58.  values of the modulation are achieved simultaneously for all channels   180   or    180   is equal to the greatest possible distance between the modulation phases  of the channels       Distribution pop up menu  Available only in surround instances  Defines how the phase  offsets between the individual channels are distributed in the surround field  You can  choose from    circular        leftesright        fronteorear        random     and    new random     distributions     Note  When you load a setting that uses the    random    option  the saved phase offset  value is recalled  If you want to randomize the phase setting again  choose    new random     in the Distribution pop up menu     Phaser Output Section    Output Mix slider and field  Determines the balance of dry and wet signals  Negative  values result in a phase inverted mix of the effect and direct  dry  signal       Warmth button  Enables a distortion circuit  suitable for warm overdrive effects     Ringshifter   The Ringshifter effect combines a ring modulator with a frequency shifter effect  Both  effects were popular during the 1970s  and are currently experiencing something of a  renaissance     The ring modulator modulates the amplitude of the input signal using either the internal  oscillator or a side chain signal  The frequency spectrum of the resulting effect signal  equals the sum and difference of the frequency content in the two original signals  Its  sound is often described as metallic or clangoro
59. 2  It has a richer mid range    and is more assertive in the treble range        20 Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Cabinet Description             Sunshine 4 x 12 A 4x 12  closed back cabinet with a thick  rich mid range    Sunshine 1 x 12 A single 12  open back combo amp cabinet with a bright  lively  sound that has sweet highs  and transparent mids    Stadium 4 x 12 A tight  bright  closed back British cabinet with bold upper mid  peaks    Stadium 2 x 12 A nicely balanced modern British open back cabinet  Tonally  it is    a compromise between the fatness of the Blackface 4 x 10 and the  brilliance of the British 2 x 12                 Boutique Retro 2 x 12 A 2x 12  cabinet based on the British 2 x 12  It has a rich  open  mid range and is more assertive in the treble range    High Octane 4 x 12 A modern  closed back European cabinet with strong lows and  highs and scooped mids appropriate for metal and heavy rock    Turbo 4 x 12 A modern  closed back European cabinet with strong lows  very  strong highs  and deeply scooped mids appropriate for metal and  heavy rock    Pawnshop 1 x 8 Single 8  speaker cabinet that has excellent low end punch    Direct This option bypasses the speaker emulation section        Tip  For creative sound design  select the Direct option  place Space Designer in the Insert    slot after Amp Designer  and then load one of Space Designer s    warped    speaker impulse  responses     Using Amp Designer   s Equalizer   Hardware amplifier tone controls v
60. BP  mode  the filter cutoff determines the center frequency of the frequency band that  is allowed to pass       Resonance knob and field  Boosts or cuts the signals in the frequency band that surrounds  the cutoff frequency  Use of very high Resonance values causes the filter to begin  oscillating at the cutoff frequency  This self oscillation occurs before you reach the  maximum Resonance value       Fatness slider and field  Boosts the level of low frequency content  When you set Fatness  to its maximum value  adjusting Resonance has no effect on frequencies below the  cutoff frequency  This parameter is used to compensate for a weak or    brittle    sound  caused by high resonance values  when in the lowpass filter mode     e State Variable Filter buttons  Switch the filter between highpass  HP   bandpass  BP   or  lowpass  LP  modes     e 4 Pole Lowpass Filter buttons  Set the slope of the filter to 6  12  18  or 24 dB per  octave    when the lowpass  LP  filter is chosen as the State Variable Filter     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 135    136    AutoFilter Distortion Parameters   The Distortion parameters can be used to overdrive the filter input or filter output  The  distortion input and output modules are identical  but their respective positions in the  signal chain   before and after the filter  respectively   result in remarkably different  sounds        e Input knob and field  Sets the amount of distortion applied before the filter section       Output knob and field
61. Controls the stereo image of the reverb  At 0   the effect    generates a monaural reverb  At 200   the stereo base is artificially expanded       High Cut knob and field  Frequencies above the set value are filtered from the reverb    signal  Uneven or absorbent surfaces   wallpaper  wood paneling  carpets  and so  on tend to reflect lower frequencies better than higher frequencies  The High Cut filter  mimics this effect  If you set the High Cut filter so that it is wide open  maximum value    the reverb will sound as if it is reflecting off stone or glass       Density knob and field  Controls the density of the diffuse reverb tail  Ordinarily you    want the signal to be as dense as possible  In rare instances  however  a high Density  value can color the sound  which you can fix by reducing the Density knob value   Conversely  if you select a Density value that is too low  the reverb tail will sound grainy       Reverb Time knob and field  Time it takes for the reverb level to drop by 60 dB   often    indicated as RT60  Most natural rooms have a reverb time somewhere in the range of  1 to 3 seconds  This time is reduced by absorbent surfaces  such as carpet and curtains   and soft or dense furnishings  such as sofas  armchairs  cupboards  and tables  Large  empty halls or churches have reverb times of up to 8 seconds  with some cavernous  or cathedral like venues extending beyond that       Diffusion slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the diffusion of the 
62. Enable or disable individual EQ bands      Frequency fields  Set the frequency for the selected EQ band      Gain fields  Adjust the gain cut or boost for the selected EQ band      Q fields  Set the Q factor for the two parametric bands  The Q factor can be adjusted  from 0 1  very narrow  to 10  very wide      To graphically edit an EQ curve in Space Designer  1 Enable the EQ and one or more bands with the EQ On Off and EQ band buttons in the  top row of the parameter bar     238 Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    2 Drag the cursor horizontally over the main display  When the cursor is in the access area  of a band  the corresponding curve and parameter area is automatically highlighted and  a pivot point is displayed        3 Drag horizontally to adjust the frequency of the band   4 Drag vertically to increase or decrease the Gain of the band     5 Vertically drag the  illuminated  pivot point of a parametric EQ band to raise or lower the  Q value     Working with Space Designer   s Filter    Space Designer s filter provides control over the timbre of the reverb     You can select from several filter types and also have envelope control over the filter  cutoff  which is independent from the volume envelope  Changes to filter settings result  in a recalculation of the impulse response  rather than a straight change to the sound as  it plays through the reverb     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 239    240    Using Space Designer s Main Filter Parame
63. Loads of resonance in the low frequency range  therefore well suited  for Combos  crunchy sounds are also possible with low Bass control settings     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    31    32         UK 4x 12 closed slanted  when used in combination with off center miking  you will  get an interesting mid frequency range  therefore  this model works well when  combined with High Gain amps          US 1 x 10 open back  Not much resonance in the low frequency range  Suitable for  use with blues harmonicas          US 1 x 12 open back 1  Open enclosure of an American lead combo with a single 12   speaker          US 1 x 12 open back 2  Open enclosure of an American clean crunch combo with a  single 12  speaker          US 1 x 12 open back 3  Open enclosure of another American clean crunch combo  with a single 12  speaker          US broad range  Simulation of a classic electric piano speaker          Analog simulation  Internal speaker simulation of a well known British tube  preamplifier          UK 1 x 12  GarageBand   A British Class A tube open back with a single 12  speaker          UK 4x 12  GarageBand   Classic closed enclosure with four 12  speakers  black series    suitable for rock     US 1 x 12 open back  GarageBand   Open enclosure of an American lead combo with  a single 12  speaker          US 1x 12 bass reflex  GarageBand   Closed bass reflex cabinet with a single 12  speaker          DI Box  This option allows you to bypass the speaker simulation section     Amp Spea
64. Logic Pro 9    Copyright    2011 Apple Inc  All rights reserved     Your rights to the software are governed by the  accompanying software license agreement  The owner or  authorized user of a valid copy of Logic Pro software may  reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to  use such software  No part of this publication may be  reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes  such  as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid  for support services     The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc   registered in  the U S  and other countries  Use of the    keyboard    Apple  logo  Shift Option K  for commercial purposes without  the prior written consent of Apple may constitute  trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation  of federal and state laws     Every effort has been made to ensure that the information  in this manual is accurate  Apple is not responsible for  printing or clerical errors     Note  Because Apple frequently releases new versions  and updates to its system software  applications  and  Internet sites  images shown in this manual may be slightly  different from what you see on your screen     Apple   1 Infinite Loop  Cupertino  CA 95014  408 996 1010    www ole com       Apple  the Apple logo  Finder  GarageBand  Logic   Macintosh  and MainStage are trademarks of Apple Inc    registered in the U S  and other countries     Other company and product names mentioned herein  are trademarks of their respective companie
65. MS   While Peak is more technically  accurate  RMS provides a better indication of how people perceive the signal loudness     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 91    92    Note  If you activate Auto Gain and RMS simultaneously  the signal may become  over saturated  If you hear any distortion  switch Auto Gain off and adjust the Gain slider  until the distortion is inaudible     Using a Side Chain with the Compressor   Use of a side chain with a compressor is common  This allows you to use the dynamics   level changes  of another channel strip as a control source for compression  For example   the dynamics of a drum groove can be used to rhythmically change the compression   and therefore dynamics  of a guitar part     Important  The side chain signal is used only as a detector or trigger in this situation  The  side chain source is used to control the Compressor  but the audio of the side chain signal  is not actually routed through the Compressor     To use a side chain with the Compressor  Insert the Compressor into a channel strip     Select the channel strip that carries the desired signal  side chain source  in the Side Chain  menu of the Compressor plug in     Choose the desired analysis method  Max or Sum  from the Side Chain Detection pop up  menu     Adjust the Compressor parameters     DeEsser   The DeEsser is a frequency specific compressor  designed to compress a particular  frequency band within a complex audio signal  It is used to eliminate hiss  also called  sib
66. PU intensive synthesized IRs     Zoom to fit a o     definition  100     195s          Natural reverbs contain most of their spatial information in the first few milliseconds   Toward the end of the reverb  the pattern of reflections   signals bouncing off walls and  so on   becomes more diffuse  In other words  the reflected signals become quieter and  increasingly nondirectional  containing far less spatial information     To emulate this phenomenon   as well as to conserve CPU power   you can configure  Space Designer to use the full IR resolution only at the onset of the reverb  and to use a  reduced IR resolution toward the end of the reverb     The Definition parameter defines the crossover point   where the switch to the reduced  IR resolution occurs  It is displayed in both milliseconds  indicating when the crossover  occurs  and as a percentage    100  is equal to the length of the full resolution IR     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    Using Space Designer s Rev Vol Compensation  Rev Vol Compensation  Reverb Volume Compensation  attempts to match the perceived   not actual  volume differences between impulse response files     re  rev vol compensation    It is enabled by default and should generally be left in this mode  although you may find  that it isn   t successful with all types of impulse responses  If this is the case  turn it off and  adjust input and output levels accordingly     Using Space Designer s Output Sliders   The output parameters 
67. Pedalboard   s Routing Area   Pedalboard has two discrete signal buses   Bus A and Bus B   that are found in the Routing  area above the Pedal area  These busses provide a great deal of flexibility when you are  setting up signal processing chains  All stompboxes that you drag into the Pedal area are  inserted into Bus A  by default     Note  The Routing area appears when you move your pointer to a position immediately  above the Pedal area  and it disappears when you move the pointer away  When you  create a second bus routing  the Routing area remains open even when your pointer is  not over it  You can close the Routing area by clicking the small latch button at the top   and then the Routing area will open or close automatically when you move your pointer  over it        To create a second bus routing  Do one of the following       Move your pointer immediately above the Pedal area to open the Routing area  and click  the name of a stompbox in the Routing area  The pedal name moves upward  and the  chosen stompbox is routed to Bus B  Two gray lines appear in the Routing area  which  represent Bus A and Bus B  A Mixer utility pedal is automatically added to the end of the  signal chain       Drag a Splitter utility pedal into the Pedal area when more than one pedal is inserted   This also inserts a Mixer at the end of the signal chain if one doesn t already exist   To remove the second bus routing  Do one of the following       Remove the Mixer and Splitter utility pedals 
68. Phase EQ    The high quality Linear Phase EQ effect is similar to the Channel EQ  sharing the same  parameters and eight band layout  The Linear Phase EQ uses a different underlying  technology  however  which perfectly preserves the phase of the audio signal  This phase  coherency is assured  even when you apply the wildest EQ curves to the sharpest signal  transients     A further difference is that the Linear Phase EQ uses a fixed amount of CPU resources   regardless of how many bands are active  The Linear Phase EQ also introduces greater  amounts of latency  Therefore  it is strongly recommended that you use it for mastering  previously recorded audio and avoid using it when you are playing software instruments  live  for example     Tip  The parameters of the Channel EQ and Linear Phase EQ are identical  enabling you  to freely copy settings between them  If you replace a Channel EQ with a Linear Phase EQ   or vice versa  in the same insert slot  the current settings are automatically transferred   to the new EQ     Chapter5 Equalizers    117    118    Linear Phase EQ Parameters   The left side of the Channel EQ window includes the Gain and Analyzer controls  The  central area of the window includes the graphical display and parameters for shaping  each EQ band        Linear Phase EQ Gain and Analyzer Controls  Master Gain slider and field  Sets the overall output level of the signal  Use it after  boosting or cutting individual frequency bands     Analyzer button  Turn
69. Pre Post EQ button  Determines whether the Analyzer shows the frequency curve before  or after EQ is applied  when Analyzer mode is active     Chapter 5 Equalizers      Resolution pop up menu  Sets the sample resolution for the Analyzer  with the following  menu items  low  1024 points   medium  2048 points   and high  4096 points      Channel EQ Graphic Display Section    Band On Off buttons  Click to turn the corresponding band on or off  Each button icon  indicates the filter type     Band 1 is a highpass filter   Band 2 is a low shelving filter   Bands 3 through 6 are parametric bell filters   Band 7 is a high shelving filter   Band 8 is a lowpass filter     Graphic display  Shows the current curve of each EQ band       Drag horizontally in the section of the display that encompasses each band to adjust  the frequency of the band       Drag vertically in the section of the display that encompasses each band to adjust  the gain of each band  except bands 1 and 8   The display reflects your changes  immediately       Drag the pivot point in each band to adjust the Q factor  Q is shown beside the cursor  when it is moved over a pivot point     Channel EQ Parameter Section    Frequency fields  Adjust the frequency of each band     Gain Slope fields  Set the amount of gain for each band  For bands 1 and 8  this changes  the slope of the filter       Q fields  Adjust the Q factor or resonance for each band   the range of frequencies  around the center frequency that are affecte
70. The Grooveshifter allows you to rhythmically vary audio recordings  imparting a swing  feel to the input signal  Imagine a guitar solo played in straight eighth or sixteenth notes   The Grooveshifter can make this straightforward solo swing     The reference tempo is the project tempo  The Grooveshifter automatically follows all  changes to the project tempo     Chapter 133 Specialized Effects and Utilities 253    254    Note  The Grooveshifter relies on perfect matching of the project tempo with the tempo  of the treated recording  Any tempo variations deliver less precise results        Grooveshifter Source Material Parameters    Beat and Tonal buttons  Switch between two algorithms  each optimized for different  types of audio material       Beat algorithm  Optimized for percussive input material  The Grain Size slider has no  effect when Beat is chosen       Tonal algorithm  Optimized for tonal input material  Because this algorithm is based  on granular synthesis  it offers an additional Grain Size slider       Grain Size slider and field  Sets the size of the grains   technically speaking  this  determines the analysis precision  The  default  Auto setting automatically derives a  suitable grain size value from the incoming signal     Grooveshifter Swing Parameters    Grid buttons  Determine the beat division used as a timing reference by the algorithm  when analyzing the audio material       Choose 1 8 if the audio material contains primarily eighth notes  and choose 1
71. ack  circuit  which means that the filtering effect increases in intensity with each delay  repeat  If you want an increasingly muddy and confused tone  move the High Cut slider  towards the left  For ever thinner echoes  move the Low Cut slider towards the right   If you re unable to hear the effect even though you seem to have a suitable  configuration  be sure to check out both the Dry and Wet controls and the filter  settings   move the High Cut slider to the far right  and the Low Cut slider to the far  left       Smooth slider and field  Evens out the LFO and flutter effect     LFO Rate knob and field  Sets the frequency of the LFO       LFO Depth knob and field  Sets the amount of LFO modulation  A value of 0 turns delay    modulation off     Flutter Rate and Intensity sliders and fields  Simulate the speed irregularities of the tape  transports used in analog tape delay units       Flutter Rate  Sets the speed variation       Flutter Intensity  Determines how pronounced the effect is       Dry and Wet sliders and fields  Independently control the amount of original and effect    signal     Distortion Level slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Determines the level of the  distorted  tape saturation  signal     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Distortion Effects       You can use Distortion effects to recreate the sound of analog or digital distortion and  to radically transform your audio     Distortion effects simulate the distortion created by vacuum tubes  transis
72. active  This parameter is grayed out when Beat  Sync is disabled     Decay Delay knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes for the LFO to go from 0  to its maximum value     Rate Mod  knob and field  Sets the rate of modulation for the LFO frequency  independent  of the input signal level  Typically  when the input signal exceeds the threshold  the  modulation width of the LFO increases from 0 to the Rate Mod  value  This parameter  allows you to override this behavior     Stereo Phase knob and field  In stereo instances of the AutoFilter  sets the phase  relationship of the LFO modulations between the two channels     Cutoff Mod  slider and field  Determines the impact of the LFO on the cutoff frequency     Retrigger button  When the Retrigger button is active  the waveform starts at 0 each  time the threshold is exceeded     Waveform buttons  Click one of the following buttons to set the shape of the LFO  waveform  descending sawtooth  ascending sawtooth  triangle  pulse wave  or random     Pulse Width slider and field  Shapes the curve of the selected waveform     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    AutoFilter Filter Parameters  The Filter parameters allow you to precisely tailor the tonal color           e Cutoff knob and field  Sets the cutoff frequency for the filter  Higher frequencies are  attenuated  whereas lower frequencies are allowed to pass through in a lowpass filter   The reverse is true in a highpass filter  When the State Variable Filter is set to bandpass   
73. ag it to the left to go forward in time  or to  the right to go backward in time     This method also works when more than one tap is selected     Note  Editing the Delay Time parameter in the Tap Delay field of the Tap parameter bar  also moves a tap in time  For more details about the Tap Delay field and editing taps  see  Editing Taps in Delay Designer s Tap Parameter Bar     To delete a tap  Do one of the following       Select it and press the Delete or Backspace key     Chapter 2 Delay Effects 59    60      Select a tap letter in the Identification bar and drag it downward  out of the Tap display        This method also works when more than one tap is selected     To delete all selected taps  Control click  or right click  a tap  and choose    Delete tap s     from the shortcut menu     Using Delay Designer s Tap Toggle Buttons   Each tap has its own toggle button in the Toggle bar  These buttons offer you a quick  way to graphically activate and deactivate parameters  The specific parameter being  toggled by the toggle buttons depends on the current view button selection        e Cutoff view  Toggle buttons turn the filter on or off      Reso view  Toggle buttons switch the filter slope between 6 dB and 12 cB      Pitch view  Toggle buttons switch pitch transposition on or off    e Pan view  Toggle buttons switch between the Flip modes      Level view  Toggle buttons mute or unmute the tap    To temporarily switch the mute state of taps   Command Option click a toggle 
74. ameter that you want to control  with a MIDI controller       Macro A H Value sliders and fields  Set  and display  the current value for the parameter  chosen in the corresponding Macro Target pop up menu     To assign a Macro A H Target  Do one of the following     Click any of the Macro A H Target pop up menus  and choose the parameter that you  want to control     Each stompbox parameter is shown in the following way     Slot number   Pedal  Name    Parameter     As examples     Slot 1   Blue Echo    Time     or    Slot 2    Roswell  Ringer   Feedback     The    slot    number refers to the pedal position  as they appear from  left to right in the Pedal area     Choose the     Auto assign     item in any Macro A H Target pop up menu  then click the  appropriate parameter in any inserted pedal     Note  The chosen parameter is displayed in the Macro A H Target pop up menu     Distortion Pedals  This section describes the distortion effects pedals     Stompbox Description    Candy Fuzz A bright     nasty    distortion effect  Drive controls the input signal  gain  Level sets the effect volume        Double Dragon A deluxe distortion effect  It offers independent level controls for  input  Input  and output  Level   Drive controls the amount of  saturation applied to the input signal  The Tone knob sets the cutoff  frequency  The Squash knob sets the threshold for the internal  compression circuit  Contour sets the amount of nonlinear distortion  applied to the signal  Mix s
75. and classic pedal  effects  You can play live   or process recorded audio and software instrument  parts   through these amps and effects     The amplifier models re create vintage and modern tube and solid state amps  Built in  effect units  such as reverb  tremolo  or vibrato  are also reproduced  Accompanying the  amplifiers are a variety of emulated speaker cabinets  which can be used as a matching  set or combined in different ways to create interesting hybrids     Also emulated are a number of    classic    foot pedal effects   or stompboxes   that were   and remain  popular with guitarists and keyboardists  As with their real world counterparts   you can freely chain pedals in any order to create the perfect sound     This chapter covers the following   e Amp Designer  p  11      Bass Amp  p  28    e Guitar Amp Pro  p  29    e Pedalboard  p  35     Amp Designer   Amp Designer emulates the sound of over 20 famous guitar amplifiers and the speaker  cabinets used with them  Each preconfigured model combines an amp  cabinet  and EQ  that re creates a well known guitar amplifier sound  You can process guitar signals directly   which allows you to reproduce the sound of your guitar played through these amplification  systems  Amp Designer can also be used for experimental sound design and processing   You are free to use it with other instruments  applying the sonic character of a guitar amp  to a trumpet or vocal part  for example     The amplifiers  cabinets  and EQs emula
76. and what  you intend to do with it  but a useful workflow for many situations is as follows  Set the  Channel EQ to a flat response  no frequencies boosted or cut   turn on the Analyzer and  play the audio signal  Keep an eye on the graphic display to see which parts of the  frequency spectrum have frequent peaks and which parts of the spectrum stay at a low  level  Pay particular attention to sections where the signal distorts or clips  Use the graphic  display or parameter controls to adjust the frequency bands as desired     You can reduce or eliminate unwanted frequencies  and you can raise quieter frequencies  to make them more pronounced  You can adjust the center frequencies of bands 2  through 7 to affect a specific frequency   either one you want to emphasize  such as the  root note of the music  or one you want to eliminate  such as hum or other noise  While  doing so  change the Q parameter s  so that only a narrow range of frequencies are  affected  or widen it to alter a broad area     Each EQ band has a different color in the graphic display  You can graphically adjust the  frequency of a band by dragging horizontally  Drag vertically to adjust the amount of  gain for the band  For bands 1 and 8  the slope values can be changed only in the  parameter area below the graphic display  Each band has a pivot point  a small circle on  the curve  at the location of the band   s frequency  you can adjust the Q or width of the  band by dragging the pivot point vertically
77. are found around the main display     Input Reset  F ilter Env ta   Reverse Output    Output sliders          Input slider   Latency Compensation Definition area Rev Vol Compensation  button button      Input slider  Determines how Space Designer processes a stereo or surround input  signal  For more information  see Using Space Designer s Input Slider       Latency Compensation button  Switches Space Designer s internal latency compensation  feature on or off  See Using Space Designer s Latency Compensation Feature       Definition area  Lets you switch to a less defined IR set  in order to emulate reverb  diffusion and save CPU resources  See Using Space Designer s Definition Parameter       Rev Vol Compensation button  Engages Space Designer s internal IR volume matching  function  See Using Space Designer   s Rev Vol Compensation       Output sliders  Adjust output levels  See Using Space Designer s Output Sliders     Space Designer Global Parameters  Lower Section  These parameters are found below the main display                 Ss definition  100      200s                   Reverb Spread  Uolume Envelope        REN 7 Fi p Pre  Diy 5 id  init level attack time decay time enp lin endlevel      69  s  oos e  iss S          oo s Tane OANE            Pre Dly knob  Sets the reverb s predelay time  or time between the original signal and  the first reflections from the reverb  See Working with Pre Dly  Predelay  in  Space Designer       IR Start knob  Sets the playback start 
78. ary between models and manufacturers  There s a  good chance  for example  that the treble knobs on two different models target different  frequencies  or provide different levels of cut or boost  Some equalizer  EQ  sections  amplify the guitar signal more than others  affecting the way the amp distorts     Amp Designer provides multiple EQ types to mirror these variations in hardware amplifiers   No matter which EQ type you choose  you ll see an identical set of controls  Bass  Mids   and Treble  Switching between EQ types can result in these controls behaving very  differently     Selecting an EQ type other than the one traditionally associated with a certain amplifier  typically results in significant tonal changes  although these may not necessarily be for  the better  As with hardware amplifiers  Amp Designer s EQs are calibrated to perform  well with particular amplifier sounds  Choosing other EQ types can sometimes produce  a thin  or unpleasantly distorted tone  See Amp Designer Equalizer Type Reference Table     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    21    Despite these less pleasant sounding possibilities  you should experiment with different  amplifier and EQ combinations because many will sound great together     EQ pop up menu    a ize                           F     ese    872 th 8  0    9 3  10 10    MIDS TREBLE 4    Bass  Mids  and Treble    knobs    _4       The EQ parameters include the EQ pop up menu and the Bass  Mids  and Treble knobs   These parameters are found 
79. atically enables the main filter     Controls the Attack Time  endpoint  and Decay  Time startpoint  and  Break Level parameters  simultaneously        Controls the Decay  endpoint and End Level  parameters  simultaneously        Filter Enuelope    init level attack time break level decay time end level         170 2 Hz        Init Level field  Sets the initial cutoff frequency of the filter envelope     Attack Time field  Determines the time required to reach the Break Level  see below        Break Level field  Sets the maximum filter cutoff frequency that the envelope reaches   It also acts as the separation point between the attack and decay phases of the overall  filter envelope  In other words  when this level has been reached after the attack phase   the decay phase will begin  You can create interesting filter sweeps by setting the Break  Level to a value lower than the Init Level       Decay Time field  Determines the time required  after the Break Level point  to reach  the End Level value       End Level field  Sets the cutoff frequency at the end of the filter envelope decay phase     Working with Space Designer s Global Parameters   Space Designer s global parameters affect the overall output or behavior of the effect   The global parameters are divided into two sections   those around the main display   and those below the main display     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 241    242    Space Designer Global Parameters  Upper Section  These parameters 
80. ature   4x 12  cabinets  At medium gain settings  these amps are great for chunky chords and  riffs  Raising the gain yields lyrical solo tones and powerful rhythm guitar parts  Complex  peaks and dips across the tonal spectrum keep the tones clear and appealing  even when  heavy distortion is used     Model Description    Vintage British Stack Captures the sound of a late 1960s 50 watt amp famed for its  powerful  smooth distortion  Notes retain clarity  even at maximum  gain  After four decades this remains a definitive rock tone        Modern British Stack 1980s and 1990s descendants of the Vintage British amplifier head   which were optimized for hard rock and metal styles of the time   The tones are deeper on the bottom  brighter on top  and more     scooped    in the middle than the Vintage British amp        Brown Stack Unique tones can be coaxed from a British head by running it at  lower voltages than its designers intended  The resulting    brown     sound   often more distorted and loose than the standard  tone   can add interesting thickness to a guitar sound        British Blues Combo This 2 x 12  combo has a loud  aggressive tone that is cleaner than  the British heads  yet delivers fat distortion tones at high gain  settings        Tip  You ll rarely go wrong combining a British head  a 4 x 12  cabinet  and a great riff at  high levels  But don   t hesitate to break that mold  These heads can sound stunning  through small cabinets  or at clean  low gain setting
81. available in Amp Designer  even when using a model that is based on  an amplifier that provides no reverb function  Reverb is controlled by an On Off switch  and a Level knob in the middle  above which is the Reverb pop up menu  Reverb can be  added to either the Tremolo or Vibrato effect  or used independently          On Off switch  Enables or disables the reverb effect       Reverb pop up menu  Click the word Reverb to choose one of the following reverb types  from the pop up menu  Vintage Spring  Simple Spring  Mellow Spring  Bright Spring   Dark Spring  Resonant Spring  Boutique Spring  Sweet Reverb  Rich Reverb  and Warm  Reverb  See Amp Designer Reverb Type Reference Table for information on these reverb  types     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Level knob  Sets the amount of reverb applied to the pre amplified signal     Amp Designer Reverb Type Reference Table  You can choose a reverb type by clicking the Reverb label in the center of the Amp section   The table below covers the properties of each reverb type available in Amp Designer     Reverb type Description    Vintage Spring This bright  splashy sound has largely defined combo amp reverb  since the early 1960s                                Simple Spring A darker  subtler spring sound    Mellow Spring An even darker  somewhat low fidelity spring sound    Bright Spring Has some of the brilliance of Vintage Spring  but with less surf style  splash    Dark Spring A moody sounding spring  More restrained than Mellow
82. ay not be fed back into the circuit  Delay Designer  provides up to 26 individual taps  These taps are all fed from the source signal and can  be freely edited to create delay effects that have never been heard before     51       Delay Designer provides control over the following aspects of each tap   e Level and pan position    Highpass and lowpass filtering    e Pitch transposition  up or down   Further effect wide parameters include synchronization  quantization  and feedback     As the name implies  Delay Designer offers significant sound design potential  You can  use it for everything from a basic echo effect to an audio pattern sequencer  You can  create complex  evolving  moving rhythms by synchronizing the placement of taps  This  leads to further musical possibilities when coupled with judicious use of transposition  and filtering  Alternatively  you can set up numerous taps as repeats of other taps  much  as you would use the feedback control of a simple delay  but with individual control over  each repeat     You can use Delay Designer on channel strips with mono  stereo  or surround inputs  and or outputs  See Working with Delay Designer in Surround for details on using it in  surround channel strips     Getting to Know the Delay Designer Interface  The Delay Designer interface consists of five main sections     Sync section Main display Master section    Feedback          pitch transp   flip pan spread   mute leve    2    1000 0ms  2  os  0 s   Be DA cemers i00
83. ayback  You can  however  use the integrated conditioning of the Binaural Panner to  ensure a neutral sound for speaker or headphone playback     161       162       Note  When using multiple Binaural Panners on several channels  you should turn the  integrated conditioning off and route the output of all binaurally panned signals to an  aux channel  Insert a Binaural Post Processing plug in into this aux channel and apply  diffuse field compensation to all Binaural Panner outputs at once  This approach is simpler  to manage  better sonically  and reduces computer processing requirements      x  Out 1 2    P View   Show CS v  Show insert Y    Bypass Compare  gt     Binaural Post Processing    Compensation Speaker CTC   Cross Talk    CTC   Speaker    70   a      Compensation pop up menu  Determines the type of processing applied for different  playback systems  You can choose from       Headphone FF   optimized for front direction  Setting for headphone playback  utilizing  free field compensation  In this mode  sound sources placed in front of the listening  position will have neutral sound characteristics       Headphone HB    optimized for horizontal directions  Setting for headphone playback   Optimized to deliver the most neutral sound for sources placed on  or close to  the  horizontal plane       Headphone DF   averaged over all directions  Setting for headphone playback  utilizing  diffuse field compensation  In this mode  the sound will  on average  be most neutral  f
84. back Level knob  Sets the feedback level  You can vary the feedback tap output  level before it is routed back into Delay Designer s input       A value of 0  equals no feedback       A value of 100  sends the feedback tap back into Delay Designer   s input at full  volume     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Note  If Feedback is enabled and you begin creating taps with the Tap pads  Feedback  is automatically turned off  When you stop creating taps with the Tap pads  Feedback  is automatically re enabled       Mix sliders  Independently set the levels of the dry input signal and the post processing  wet signal     Working with Delay Designer in Surround   Delay Designer   s design is optimized for use in surround configurations  With 26 taps that  can be freely positioned in the surround field  you can create some truly amazing rhythmic  and spatial effects     Delay Designer always processes each input channel independently       Ina mono stereo input and surround output configuration  Delay Designer processes  the two stereo channels independently  and the surround panner lets you place each  delay around the surround field       Ina surround input and surround output configuration  Delay Designer processes each  surround channel independently  and the surround panner lets you adjust the surround  balance of each tap in the surround field     When you instantiate Delay Designer in any surround configuration  the Pan parameter  on the Tap parameter bar is replaced with a surround
85. be perfect for your project     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator U V Detection Parameters   Human speech consists of a series of voiced sounds   tonal sounds or formants   and  aes sounds   the nanonman nasal continuants  fricatives  and plosives  mentioned  in A rt Primer on Formants  The main distinction between voiced and unvoiced sounds  is that d sounds are i by an oscillation of the vocal cords  whereas unvoiced  sounds are produced by blocking and restricting the air flow with lips  tongue  palate   throat  and larynx        Chapter 6 Filter Effects    145    146    If speech containing voiced and unvoiced sounds is used as a vocoder   s analysis signal   but the synthesis engine doesn t differentiate between voiced and unvoiced sounds  the  result will sound rather weak  To avoid this problem  the synthesis section of the vocoder  must produce different sounds for the voiced and unvoiced parts of the signal     The EVOC 20 TrackOscillator includes an Unvoiced Voiced detector for this specific purpose   This unit detects the unvoiced portions of the sound in the analysis signal and then  substitutes the corresponding portions in the synthesis signal with noise  with a mixture  of noise and synthesizer signal  or with the original signal  If the U V Detector detects  voiced parts  it passes this information to the Synthesis section  which uses the normal  synthesis signal for these portions     e    Sensitivity    Mode    U V Detection       e Sensitivity knob  Determines how re
86. button  regardless of the current view mode     When you release the Command and Option keys  the toggle buttons return to their  standard functionality in the active View mode     Chapter 2 Delay Effects       _    Note  The first time you edit a filter or pitch transpose parameter  the respective module  automatically turns on  This saves you the effort of manually turning on the filter or pitch  transposition module before editing  After you manually turn either of these modules  off  however  you need to manually switch it back on     Editing Parameters in Delay Designer   s Tap Display   You can graphically edit any tap parameter that is represented as a vertical line in   Delay Designer s Tap display  The Tap display is ideal if you want to edit the parameters  of one tap relative to other taps  or when you need to edit multiple taps simultaneously     To edit a tap parameter in the Tap display  Click the view button of the parameter you want to edit     Vertically drag the bright line of the tap you wish to edit  or one of the selected taps  if  multiple taps are selected         If you have chosen multiple taps  the values of all selected taps will be changed relative  to each other     Note  The method outlined above is slightly different for the Filter Cutoff and Pan  parameters  See Editing Filter Cutoff in Delay Designer s Tap Display and Editing Pan in  Delay Designer s Tap Display     To set the values of multiple taps  Command drag horizontally and vertically a
87. by dragging vertically on the Overview display   to view specific taps       Overview display  Shows all taps in the time range  See Zooming and Navigating  Delay Designer s Tap Display     Chapter 2 Delay Effects 53    54      Toggle buttons  Click to enable or disable the parameters of a particular tap  The  parameter being toggled is chosen with the view buttons  The label at the left of the  toggle bar always indicates the parameter being toggled  For more information  see  Using Delay Designer s Tap Toggle Buttons     e Tap display  Represents each tap as a shaded line  Each tap contains a bright bar  or  dot for stereo panning  that indicates the value of the parameter  You can directly edit  tap parameters in the Tap display area  For more details  see Editing Parameters in  Delay Designer s Tap Display      Identification bar  Shows an identification letter for each tap  It also serves as a time    position indicator for each tap  You may freely move taps backward or forward in time  along this bar timeline  See Moving and Deleting Taps in Delay Designer     Using Delay Designer s View Buttons  The view buttons determine which parameter is represented in Delay Designer s Tap  display          Cutoff button  Shows the highpass and lowpass filter cutoff frequencies of taps     Reso nance  button  Shows the filter resonance value of each tap     Transp ose  button  Shows the pitch transposition of each tap     Pan button  Shows the pan parameter of each tap     For mono 
88. cabinets    Amp Designer allows you to drive a small speaker with a powerful head  or to pair a tiny  amp with a 4x 12  cabinet     There s nothing wrong with trying random combinations  But if you consider the variables  that determine a cabinet   s sound  you ll be able to make educated guesses about  non traditional amplifier and cabinet combinations  Some factors to consider     Combos or Stacks   Combo amps include both an amplifier and speakers in a single enclosure  These usually  have an open back  so the sound resonates in multiple directions  The resulting sound is     open       with bright  airy highs and a general feeling of spaciousness  Amplifier    stacks     consist of an amplifier head  with the speakers in a separate cabinet  These cabinets  generally have a closed back  and project the sound forward in a tight  focused    beam      They tend to sound more powerful than open back cabinets  and typically have a tighter  low end response at the expense of some high end transparency     Old or New Speakers   Amp Designer models that are based on vintage cabinets capture the character of aged  speakers  These may be a bit looser and duller sounding than new speakers  but many  players prefer them for their smoothness and musicality  Sounds based on new cabinets  tend to have more snap and bite     Large Speakers or Small Speakers   A larger speaker doesn   t guarantee a larger sound  In fact  the most popular bass guitar  cabinet of all time uses only small 8  
89. cale to adjust the overall gain of the filter curve from    30 to  30 dB     Chapter5 Equalizers    The left scale   and the right  if the Analyzer is inactive   shows the cB values for the filter  curve in an appropriate color     Single Band EQs  The sections below provide descriptions for the following single band EQ effects included  in Logic Pro     e Low Cut and High Cut Filter  e High Pass and Low Pass Filter  e High Shelving and Low Shelving EQ      Parametric EQ    You can find these effects by opening the plug in menu and choosing EQ  gt  Single Band     Low Cut and High Cut Filter   The Low Cut Filter attenuates the frequency range that falls below the selected frequency   The High Cut Filter attenuates the frequency range above the selected frequency  Use  the Frequency slider and field to set the cutoff frequency      x  Inst 1 E Inst 1  gp View v ShowCS v Show insert v gp View   ShowCS v Show insert v    Bypass  lt   gt   default Bypass  lt   gt   default    Low Cut High Cut    Frequency     1000Hz     Frequency    3900Hz a       High Pass and Low Pass Filter   The High Pass Filter affects the frequency range below the set frequency  Higher  frequencies pass through the filter  You can use the High Pass Filter to eliminate the bass  below a selectable frequency     Chapter 5 Equalizers    In contrast  the Low Pass Filter affects the frequency range above the selected frequency      x  Inst 1 Inst 1  p View v ShowCS   Show insert v Ca View   ShowCS v Show insert 
90. ces a  powerful crunch sound  If you use the British Gain or Modern Gain amps  the same  Gain setting produces heavy distortion  suitable for lead solos         Bass  Mids  and Treble knobs  Adjust the frequency range levels of the EQ models  similar  to the tone knobs on a hardware guitar amplifier       Presence knob  Adjusts the high frequency range level  The Presence parameter affects  only the output  Master  stage of Guitar Amp Pro       Master knob  Sets the output volume of the amplifier   going to the speaker  For tube  amplifiers  increasing the Master level typically produces a more compressed and  saturated sound  resulting in a more distorted and powerful   that is  louder   signal   High Master settings can produce an extremely loud output that can damage your  speakers or hearing  so ramp this up slowly  In Guitar Amp Pro  the Master parameter  modifies the sonic character  and the final output level is set using the Output parameter  at the bottom of the interface  See Setting the Guitar Amp Pro Output Level     Getting to Know Guitar Amp Pro   s Effects Section  The effects parameters include Tremolo  Vibrato  and Reverb  which emulate the processors  found on many amplifiers     You can use the pop up menu to choose either Tremolo  which modulates the amplitude  or volume of the sound  or Vibrato  which modulates the pitch     Reverb can be added to either of these effects  or used independently     To use or adjust an effect  you must first enable it by cl
91. cessors can  help  Denoiser eliminates or reduces noise below a threshold level  Enhance Timing  enhances the timing of audio recordings  Exciter can add life to your recordings by  generating artificial high frequency components  Grooveshifter enabes you to create  rhythmic variations in your recordings  SubBass generates an artificial bass signal that is  derived from the incoming signal     This chapter covers the following   Denoiser  p  249     Enhance Timing  p  251   Exciter  p  252   Grooveshifter  p  253     Speech Enhancer  p  255   SubBass  p  256     Denoiser   The Denoiser eliminates or reduces any noise below a threshold volume level  The Denoiser  uses fast Fourier transform  FFT  analysis to recognize frequency bands of lower volume  and less complex harmonic structure  It then reduces these low level  less complex bands  to the appropriate dB level  See Denoiser Main Parameters     If you use the Denoiser too aggressively  however  the algorithm produces artifacts  which  are usually less desirable than the existing noise  If using the Denoiser produces these  artifacts  you can use the three Smoothing knobs to reduce or eliminate them  See Denoiser  Smoothing Parameters     To use the Denoiser  Locate a section of the audio where only noise is audible  and set the Threshold value so  that only signals at  or below  this level are filtered out     249       2 Play the audio signal and set the Reduce value to the point where noise reduction is  optimal but lit
92. ch EQ  p  121    e Single Band EQs  p  127    e Silver EQ  p  129     111       Channel EQ    The Channel EQ is a highly versatile multiband EQ  It provides eight frequency bands   including lowpass and highpass filters  low and high shelving filters  and four flexible  parametric bands  It also features an integrated Fast Fourier Transform  FFT  Analyzer that  you can use to view the frequency curve of the audio you want to modify  allowing you  to see which parts of the frequency spectrum may need adjustment     You can use the Channel EQ to shape the sound of individual tracks or audio files  or for  tone shaping on an overall project mix  The Analyzer and graphic controls make it easy  to view and change the audio signal in real time     Tip  The parameters of the Channel EQ and Linear Phase EQ are identical  enabling you  to freely copy settings between them  If you replace a Channel EQ with a Linear Phase EQ   or vice versa  in the same Insert slot  the current settings are automatically transferred  to the new EQ     Channel EQ Parameters   The left side of the Channel EQ window features the Gain and Analyzer controls  The  central area of the window includes the graphic display and parameters for shaping each  EQ band     Analyzer       Channel EQ Gain and Analyzer Controls    Master Gain slider and field  Sets the overall output level of the signal  Use it after  boosting or cutting individual frequency bands       Analyzer button  Turns the Analyzer on or off       
93. chord  This allows subtle or savage pitch corrections and can be used  creatively on unpitched material with high harmonic content  such as cymbals and  high hats          Pitch Quantize Strength slider  Determines how pronounced the automatic pitch  correction is     Chapter 6 Filter Effects      Pitch Quantize Glide slider  Sets the amount of time the pitch correction takes  allowing  sliding transitions to quantized pitches       Root Scale keyboard and pop up menu  Define the pitch or pitches that the tracking  oscillator is quantized to       Max Track value field  Sets the highest frequency  All frequencies above this threshold  are cut  making pitch detection more robust  If pitch detection produces unstable  results  reduce this parameter to the lowest possible setting that allows all appropriate  input signals to be heard or processed     Quantizing the Pitch of the Tracking Oscillator  You can use the Root Scale keyboard and pop up menu to define the pitch or pitches  that the tracking oscillator is quantized to     To choose a root or scale  Click the green value field below the Root Scale label to open the pop up menu     Choose the scale or chord that you want to use as the basis for pitch correction     Note  You can also set the root key of the respective scale or chord by vertically dragging  the Root value field  or by double clicking it and entering a root between C and B  The  Root parameter is not available when the Root Scale value is set to    chromatic 
94. cross several taps in the Tap display     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    62    Parameter values change to match the mouse position as you drag across the taps   Command dragging across several taps allows you to draw value curves  much like using  a pencil to create a curved line on a piece of paper        Aligning Delay Designer Tap Values  You can use Delay Designer   s Tap display to graphically align tap parameter values that  are represented as vertical lines     To align the values of several taps  1 Command click in the Tap display  and move the pointer while holding down the  Command key  This will result in a line trailing behind the pointer        aimee    eeeey Tar    2 Click the appropriate position to mark the end point of the line     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    The values of taps that fall between the start and end points are aligned along the line        Editing Filter Cutoff in Delay Designer s Tap Display   Whereas the steps outlined in Editing Parameters in Delay Designer s Tap Display apply  to most graphically editable parameters  the Cutoff and Pan parameters work in a slightly  different fashion        In Cutoff view  each tap actually shows two parameters  highpass and lowpass filter cutoff  frequency  The filter cutoff values can be adjusted independently by dragging the specific  cutoff frequency line   the upper line is lowpass and the lower line is highpass   or both  cutoff frequencies can be adjusted by dragging between them     When the highpass filt
95. d     Note  The Q parameter of Band 1 and Band 8 has no effect when the slope is set to  6 dB Oct  When the Q parameter is set to an extremely high value  such as 100  these  filters affect only a very narrow frequency band and can be used as notch filters     e Link button  Activates Gain Q coupling  which automatically adjusts the Q  bandwidth   when you raise or lower the gain on any EQ band  to preserve the perceived bandwidth  of the bell curve     Analyzer Mode buttons  Extended Parameters area   Choose Peak or RMS       Analyzer Decay slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Adjust the decay rate  in dB  per second  of the Analyzer curve  peak decay in Peak mode or an averaged decay in  RMS mode      Chapter5   Equalizers 113    114      Gain Q Couple Strength pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Choose the amount  of Gain Q coupling     e Choose    strong    to preserve most of the perceived bandwidth     Choose    light    or    medium    to allow some change as you raise or lower the gain       The asymmetric settings feature a stronger coupling for negative gain values than  for positive values  so the perceived bandwidth is more closely preserved when you  cut  rather than boost  gain     Note  If you play back automation of the Q parameter with a different Gain Q Couple  setting  the actual Q values will be different than when the automation was recorded     Using the Channel EQ   The way you use the Channel EQ is obviously dependent on the audio material 
96. d  bright  clean sounds        Boutique Retro Combo A 2x 12  combo inspired by high end modern amps that combine  the sounds of several great 1960s combos  It excels at shimmering  clean tones and crunch tones  making it a good choice when you  want an old fashioned flavor  but with the crisp highs and defined  lows of a modern amplifier        Pawnshop Combo A 1x8  combo based on the inexpensive amps sold in American  department stores in the 1960s  Despite their limited features and  budget workmanship  these amps are the secret behind the sound  of many rock  blues  and punk players  The clean sounds are warm   and distorted sounds are thick and satisfying  despite the small  speaker        Transparent Preamp As the name suggests  a preamp stage with no coloration  You  should note that the Transparent Preamp is activated in the Amp  pop up menu  not in the Model pop up menu        Tip  Try pairing the Studio Combo amp with one of the 4x 12  cabinets for a heavier  sound  The Boutique Retro Amp has very sensitive tone controls  providing countless  tonal shadings  Even extreme settings can yield great results  Combine the Pawnshop  Combo amp with Pedalboard   s Hi Drive or Candy Fuzz stompboxes to emulate hard rock  tones of the late 1960s  See Distortion Pedals and Pedalboard     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 17    18    Building a Customized Amp Designer Combo   You can use one of the default models or you can create your own hybrid of different  amplifiers  cabinets  and so
97. d field  Sets the amount of gain applied to the output signal       Auto Gain pop up menu  Choose a value to compensate for volume reductions caused  by compression  The choices are Off  0 dB  and    12 dB     Limiter Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level for the limiter       Limiter button  Turns the integrated limiter on or off     Output Distortion pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Choose whether to apply  clipping above 0 dB  and the type of clipping  Choices are  Off  Soft  Hard  and Clip       Activity pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Enables or disables the side chain   Choices are  Off  Listen  and On     Mode pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Choose the type of filter used for the  side chain  Choices are  LP  lowpass   BP  bandpass   HP  highpass   ParEQ  parametric    and HS  high shelving        Frequency slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the center frequency for the  side chain filter     Q slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the width of the frequency band  affected by the side chain filter       Gain slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the amount of gain applied to the  side chain signal     Mix slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Determines the balance between dry   source  and wet  effect  signals     Using the Compressor  The following section explains how to use the main Compressor parameters     Setting the Compressor Threshold and Ratio   The most important Compressor 
98. dB  and    80 dB  The Analyzer display is always dB linear     Note  When choosing a resolution  be aware that higher resolutions require significantly  more processing power  High resolution is necessary when trying to obtain accurate  analysis of very low bass frequencies  for example  It is recommended that you disable  the Analyzer or close the Channel EQ window after setting the appropriate EQ parameters   This will free up CPU resources for other tasks     DJ EQ   The DJ EQ combines high and low shelving filters  each with a fixed frequency  and one  parametric EQ  You can adjust the Frequency  Gain  and Q Factor of the latter  The DJ EQ  allows the filter gain to be reduced by as much as    30 GB     x  Inst 1    p    View   ShowCS v Show insert v    Bypass  lt   gt   default    DJ EQ   High Shelf 0 0d8   Frequency 920Hz  0 7   0 0dB    0 0dB         High Shelf slider and field  Sets the amount of gain for the high shelving filter     Frequency slider and field  Sets the center frequency of the parametric EQ     Q Factor slider and field  Sets the range  bandwidth  of the parametric EQ       Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of gain for the parametric EQ     Chapter5 Equalizers 115      Low Shelf slider and field  Sets the amount of gain for the low shelving filter     Fat EQ   The Fat EQ is a versatile multiband EQ which can be used on individual sources or overall  mixes  The Fat EQ provides up to five individual frequency bands  graphically displays  EQ curves 
99. ds the threshold     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 109    110    Release knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to return to 0 compression   after the signal falls below the threshold     Auto button  When the Auto button is enabled  the release time dynamically adjusts  to the audio material     Limiter button  Turns limiting for the main channels on or off     Threshold knob and field  Sets the threshold for the limiter on the main channels     Main Compressor Threshold sliders and fields  Set the threshold level for each  channel   including the LFE channel  which also has independent controls     Main Output Levels sliders and fields  Set the output level for each channel    including  the LFE channel  which has independent controls     Surround Compressor LFE Parameters  The Surround Compressor   s LFE section provides the following parameters        Ratio knob and field  Sets the compression ratio for the LFE channel     Knee knob and field  Sets the knee for the LFE channel     Attack knob and field  Sets the attack time for the LFE channel     Release knob and field  Sets the release time for the LFE channel     Auto button  When the Auto button is enabled  the release time automatically adjusts  to the audio signal     Threshold knob and field  Sets the threshold for the limiter on the LFE channel     Limiter button  Enables and disables limiting for the LFE channel     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors       Equalizers 5    An equalizer  commonly abbreviated a
100. e Pedal area     Notes on Splitter and Mixer Utility Use  Dragging a Splitter utility into the Pedal area automatically inserts a Mixer utility to the  far right of all inserted pedals     You cannot drag a Splitter utility to the far right of all inserted pedals  to directly after  an inserted Splitter utility  to directly in front of an inserted Mixer utility  or to an empty  space in the Pedal area     Dragging a Mixer utility into the Pedal area automatically creates a split point at the  earliest possible  the leftmost  point within the signal chain     You cannot drag a Mixer utility to the first slot in the Pedal area  to between an inserted  Splitter and Mixer utility combo  or directly to the right of an inserted Mixer utility     Using Pedalboard   s Macro Controls Area   Pedalboard provides eight Macro Targets    A through H   which are found in the Macro  Controls area below the Pedal area  These enable you to map any parameter of an inserted  stompbox as a Macro A H target  You can save different mappings with each Pedalboard  setting     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    You use a controller assignment or create a Workspace knob for    Macro A H Value     MIDI  hardware switches  sliders  or knobs can then be used to control the mapped Pedalboard  Macro A H target parameters in real time  See the Logic Pro User Manual for details     Click the triangle at the bottom left to hide or show the Macro Controls area          Macro A H Target pop up menus  Determine the par
101. e and dramatic changes to the frequency spectrum     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    Getting to Know the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Interface  The EVOC 20 TrackOscillator window is divided into several parameter sections     Synthesis In parameters       Analysis In parameters  Formant Filter parameters    ma  a    Syathesis in    aid Output parameters    6 Mode    U V Detection       Tracking Oscillator LFO parameters U V Detection  parameters parameters      Analysis In parameters  Determine how the input signal is analyzed and used by the  analysis filter bank  See EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Analysis In Parameters       U V Detection parameters  Detect the unvoiced portions of the sound in the analysis  signal  improving speech intelligibility  See EVOC 20 TrackOscillator U V Detection  Parameters     e Synthesis In parameters  Determine how the input signal is used by the synthesis filter  bank  See EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Synthesis In Parameters       Tracking Oscillator parameters  Determine how the analysis input signal is used by the  oscillator  See Basic Tracking Oscillator Parameters       Formant Filter parameters  Configure the analysis and synthesis filter banks  See EVOC 20  TrackOscillator Formant Filter Parameters       Modulation parameters  Modulate either the oscillator pitch or the Formant Shift  parameter  See EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Modulation Parameters       Output parameters  Configure the output signal of the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator  See  EVOC 20 TrackOscilla
102. e file  the Length parameter value cannot exceed  the length of the actual impulse response sample  Longer impulse responses  sampled  or synthesized  place a higher strain on the CPU     Working with Space Designer   s Envelope and EQ Parameters  Space Designer s main interface area is used to show and edit envelope and EQ parameters   It consists of three components  the button bar at the top  the main display  and the  parameter bar      The button bar is used to choose the current view edit mode     e The main display shows  and allows you to graphically edit  either the envelope or the  EQ curve       The parameter bar displays  and allows you to numerically edit  either the envelope or  the EQ curve     Button bar Display in Envelope view Display in EQ view        Fefinition  100  is    Gefinition  100     200s      Vale ENGINE a  init level attack time decay time enp lin end level Freq 69H    300H2   2000H2   5000H      Gain  8 866dB     125dB     35dB    2508                                             69  s  oms   16s 3        ox    s  Q 40 s 130         Main display Parameter bar    Using Space Designer s Button Bar  The button bar is used to switch the main display and parameter bar between envelope  and EQ views  It also includes buttons that reset the envelopes and EQ or reverse the IR        e Reset button  Resets the currently displayed envelope or EQ to its default values     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 233    234    e All button  Resets all e
103. e filtered Suppressor signal  Sens itivity  to remove the sound  from the input signal in response to the Sensitivity parameter  or Off to hear the DeEsser  output     DeEsser Suppressor Section    Suppressor Frequency knob and field  Sets the frequency band that is reduced when the  Detector sensitivity threshold is exceeded       Strength knob and field  Sets the amount of gain reduction for signals that surround  the Suppressor frequency     e Activity LED  Indicates active suppression in real time   DeEsser Center Section      Detector and Suppressor frequency displays  The upper display shows the Detector  frequency range  The lower display shows the Suppressor frequency range  in Hz      e Smoothing slider  Sets the reaction speed of the gain reduction start and end phases   Smoothing controls both the attack and release times  as they are used by compressors     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 93    94    Ducker   Ducking is acommon technique used in radio and television broadcasting  When the DJ  or announcer speaks while music is playing  the music level is automatically reduced   When the announcement has finished  the music is automatically raised to its original  volume level     Ducker provides a simple means of achieving this result with existing recordings  It does  not work in real time     Note  For technical reasons  Ducker can only be inserted in output and aux channel strips     Ducker Parameters  The Ducker has the following parameters     Ducking    Lookah
104. e formants independently  which means that you can turn a vocal track  into a Mickey Mouse voice  while maintaining the original pitch  Formants are characteristic  emphases of certain frequency ranges  They are static and do not change with pitch   Formants are responsible for the specific timbre of a given human voice     The Vocal Transformer is well suited to extreme vocal effects  The best results are achieved  with monophonic signals  including monophonic instrument tracks  It is not designed  for polyphonic voices   such as a choir on a single track   or other chordal tracks     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects    Vocal Transformer Parameters  Vocal Transformer offers the following parameters     vocal transformer         Robotize    ow G    s    Track    Formant         Pitch knob and field  Determines the amount of transposition applied to the input signal   See Setting Vocal Transformer Pitch and Formant Parameters       Robotize button  Enables Robotize mode  which is used to augment  diminish  or mirror  the melody  See Using Vocal Transformer   s Robotize Mode       Pitch Base slider and field  available only in Robotize mode   Use to transpose the note  that the Tracking parameter  see below  is following  See Using Vocal Transformer   s  Robotize Mode       Tracking slider  field  and buttons  available only in Robotize mode   Control how the  melody is changed in Robotize mode  See Using Vocal Transformer   s Robotize Mode       Mix slider and field  Defines the level
105. e movements    To change Space Designer s envelope curve shape graphically   Drag the envelope curve in the main display     Drag the small nodes attached to a line for fine adjustments to envelope curves  These  nodes are tied to the envelope curve itself  so you can view them as envelope handles     Synthesized IR  2 000s  Move the nodes vertically  or horizontally to change    the shape of the  N envelope curve        Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    235    236    Working with Space Designer   s Volume Envelope   The volume envelope is used to set the reverb   s initial level and adjust how the volume  will change over time  You can edit all volume envelope parameters numerically  and  many can also be edited graphically  see Setting Space Designer s Envelope Parameters      synthesized IR  2 000s     Pe   Init Level node           Decay Time End Level node    Zoom to fit  A D       Attack Decay Time node     definition 100     2 00s D  lt           Uolume Envelope    init level attack time decay time enp lin end level    69     s 0 23s   125s 3        19  s    Init Level field  Sets the initial volume level of the impulse response attack phase  It is  expressed as a percentage of the full scale volume of the impulse response file  The   attack phase is generally the loudest point of the impulse response  Set Init Level to   100  to ensure maximum volume for the early reflections     Attack Time field  Determines the length of time before the decay phase of 
106. e output parameters on the right        Graphic display section       Frequency band section Output section    Multipressor Graphic Display Section     Graphic display  Each frequency band is represented graphically  The amount of gain  change from 0 dB is indicated by blue bars  The band number appears in the center of  active bands  You can adjust each frequency band independently in the following ways       Drag the horizontal bar up or down to adjust the gain makeup for that band       Drag the vertical edges of a band to the left or right to set the crossover frequencies   which adjusts the band s frequency range       Crossover fields  Set the crossover frequency between adjacent bands     Gain Make up fields  Set the amount of the gain make up for each band   Multipressor Frequency Band Section      Compr ession  Thrsh old  fields  Set the compression threshold for the selected band   Setting the parameter to 0 dB results in no compression of the band       Compr ession  Ratio fields  Set the compression ratio for the selected band  Setting the  parameter to 1 1 results in no compression of the band     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 101    102    Expnd Thrsh old  fields  Set the expansion threshold for the selected band  Setting the  parameter to its minimum value     60 dB   means that only signals that fall below this  level are expanded       Expnd Ratio fields  Set the expansion ratio for the selected band     Expnd Reduction fields  Set the amount of downward expa
107. e working  on the overall surround mix     Main display    Analyzer parameters  Goniometer parameters  Goniometer shown     Analyzer    Balance   Correlation    F  MEER som    Reset       Peak parameters Balance Correlation  button    Using the Surround MultiMeter Analyzer   In Analyzer mode  the MultiMeter   s main display shows the frequency spectrum of the  input signal as 31 independent frequency bands  Each frequency band represents one third  of an octave  The Analyzer parameters are used to activate Analyzer mode  and to  customize the way that the incoming signal is shown in the main display     PER   Both    Balance   Correlation       Analyzer parameters   Scale      Analyzer button  Switches the main display to Analyzer mode     Chapter 8 Metering Tools 175    176      Sum and Max buttons  Determine whether a summed or maximum level is displayed  in the Analyzer results in the main display  These buttons are relevant only when  multiple channels are selected with the channel buttons     e Channel buttons  Used to select a single channel or a combination of channels for  metering  The number and appearance of these buttons varies when different surround  modes are chosen       View fields  Alter the way that values are shown in the Analyzer by setting the maximum  level displayed  Top  and the overall dynamic range  Range        Mode buttons  Determine how levels are displayed  You can choose from Peak  Slow  RMS  or Fast RMS characteristics       The two RMS modes 
108. ead    a     Amount    Threshold    Attack    Release         Ducking On and Off buttons  Enable or disable ducking       Lookahead On and Off buttons  Enable to ensure that the Ducker reads the incoming  signal before processing  This results in no latency   it is primarily intended for slower  computers       Amount slider and field  Defines the amount of volume reduction of the music mix  channel strip  which is  in effect  the output signal       Threshold slider and field  Determines the lowest level that a side chain signal must  attain before it begins to reduce the music mix output level   by the amount set with  the Intensity slider  If the side chain signal level doesn   t reach the threshold  the music  mix channel strip volume is not affected     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors      Attack slider and field  Controls how quickly the volume is reduced  If you want the  music mix signal to be gently faded out  set this slider to a high value     This value also controls whether or not the signal level is reduced before the threshold  is reached  The earlier this occurs  the more latency is introduced     Note  This only works if the ducking signal is not live   the ducking signal must be an  existing recording  The host application needs to analyze the signal level before it is  played back in order to predefine the point where ducking begins       Hold slider and field  Determines the duration for which the music mix channel strip  volume is reduced  This control prev
109. early 1960s that  helped define the sounds of blues  rock  and country music  They have warm  complex   clean sounds that progress smoothly through gentle distortion to raucous overdrive as  you increase the gain  Even after half a century  Tweeds can still sound contemporary   Many modern boutique amplifiers are based on Tweed style circuitry     Model Description    Small Tweed Combo A 1x 12  combo that transitions smoothly from clean to crunchy   making it a great choice for blues and rock  For extra definition  set  the Treble and Presence controls to a value around 7        Large Tweed Combo This 4 x 10  combo was originally intended for bassists  but was also  used by blues and rock guitarists  More open and  transparent sounding than the Small Tweed Combo  but can deliver  crunchy sounds        Mini Tweed Combo A small amp with a single 10  speaker  used by countless blues and  rock artists  It is quite punchy sounding  and can deliver the clean  and crunch tones that the Tweed combos are known for        Tip  Tweed combos respond beautifully to your playing dynamics  Adjust the knobs to  create a distorted sound  then reduce the level of your guitar   s volume knob to create a  cleaner tone  Turn up your guitar   s volume knob when the time comes for a scorching  solo     Classic American Combos   The Blackface  Brownface  and Silverface models are inspired by American combos of the  mid 1960s  These tend to be loud and clean with tight lows and relatively restrained 
110. eases the dynamic range below the Threshold   the Ratio slider  features a value range of 1 1 to 0 5 1     e Knee slider and field  Determines the strength of expansion at levels close to the  threshold  Lower values result in more severe or immediate expansion   hard knee   Higher values result in a gentler expansion   soft knee       Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of output gain       Auto Gain button  Compensates for the level increase caused by expansion  When  Auto Gain is active  the signal sounds softer  even when the peak level remains the  same     Note  If you dramatically change the dynamics of a signal  with extreme Threshold and  Ratio values   you may need to reduce the Gain slider level to avoid distortion  In most  cases  turning on Auto Gain will adjust the signal appropriately     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Limiter   The Limiter works much like a compressor but with one important difference  where a  compressor proportionally reduces the signal when it exceeds the threshold  a limiter  reduces any peak above the threshold to the threshold level  effectively limiting the signal  to this level     The Limiter is used primarily when mastering  Typically  you apply the Limiter as the very  last process in the mastering signal chain  where it raises the overall volume of the signal  so that it reaches  but does not exceed  0 dB     The Limiter is designed in such a way that if set to 0 dB Gain and 0 dB Output Level  it  has no effect on a normalized
111. ecisely control the signal at any   point in the signal chain     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    35    All stompbox knobs  switches  and sliders can be automated  Eight Macro controls enable  real time changes to any pedal parameter with a MIDI controller     Routing area Pedal area    Pedalboard  m    acro 8 Target    RORe        Macro Controls area Pedal Browser      The Pedal Browser shows all pedal effects and utilities  These can be dragged into the  Pedal area as part of the signal chain  See Using Pedalboard   s Pedal Browser  This  interface area is also used for the alternative import mode  See Using Pedalboard   s  Import Mode       The Pedal area is where you determine the order of effects and set effect parameters   You can add  replace  and remove stompboxes here  See Using Pedalboard   s Pedal  Area       The Routing area is used to control signal flow in the two effects busses  Bus A and  Bus B  available in Pedalboard  See Using Pedalboard   s Routing Area       The Macro Controls area is used to assign eight MIDI controllers  which can be used to  control any stompbox parameter in real time  See Using Pedalboard   s Macro Controls  Area      The effect and utility pedals are described in the following sections    e Distortion Pedals  e Modulation Pedals    Delay Pedals   e Filter Pedals   e Dynamics Pedals    e Utility Pedals    Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Using Pedalboard   s Pedal Browser   Pedalboard offers dozens of pedal effects and utilities in the Pedal
112. ectional  but any polarity can  be used   are equally spaced from the center and pointed directly at the sound source   Spacing between microphones is extremely important for the overall stereo width and   perceived positioning of instruments within the stereo field     The AB technique is commonly used for recording one section of an orchestra  such as  the string section  or perhaps a small group of vocalists  It is also useful for recording  piano or acoustic guitar     AB is not well suited to recording a full orchestra or group as it tends to smear the stereo  imaging positioning of off center instruments  It is also unsuitable for mixing down to  mono  as you run the risk of phase cancellations between channels     Chapter 7 Imaging Processors    Understanding XY Miking   In an XY recording  two directional microphones are symmetrically angled  from the center  of the stereo field  The right hand microphone is aimed at a point between the left side  and the center of the sound source  The left hand microphone is aimed at a point between  the right side and the center of the sound source  This results in a 45   to 60   off axis  recording on each channel  or 90   to 120   between channels      XY recordings tend to be balanced in both channels  with good positional information  being encoded  It is commonly used for drum recording  XY recording is also suitable for  larger ensembles and many individual instruments     Typically  XY recordings have a narrower sound field 
113. ects pedals     44 Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Stompbox Description    Heavenly Chorus A rich  sweet sounding chorus effect that can significantly thicken  the sound  Rate sets the modulation speed and can run freely  or  be synchronized with the host application tempo by enabling the  Sync button  When synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and  note values  including triplets and dotted notes   Depth sets the  strength of the effect  Feedback sends the output of the effect back  in to the input  further thickening the sound  or leading to  intermodulations  Delay sets the ratio between the original and  effect signals  The upper Bright switch position applies a fixed  frequency internal EQ to the signal  At the bottom position  the EQ  is bypassed        Phase Tripper A simple phasing effect  Rate sets the modulation speed and can  run freely  or be synchronized with the host application tempo by  enabling the Sync button  When synchronized  you can specify bar   beat and note values  including triplets and dotted notes   Depth  sets the strength of the effect  Feedback determines the amount  of the effect signal that is routed back into the input  This can  change the tonal color  can make the sweeping effect more  pronounced  or can do both        Phaze 2 A very flexible dual phaser effect  LFO 1 and LFO2 Rate sets the  modulation speed and can run freely  or be synchronized with the  host application tempo by enabling the Sync button  Ceiling and  Floor determine the f
114. ed with  the other surround channels       Surround 0 setting  bottom of slider   The entire LFE signal is passed through the reverb  unprocessed       In between positions  A mixture of LFE and surround channel information is processed     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 243    244    Using Space Designer   s Latency Compensation Feature   The complex calculations made by Space Designer take time  This time results in a  processing delay  or latency  between the direct input signal and the processed output  signal  When activated  the Latency Compensation feature delays the direct signal  in the  Output section  to match the processing delay of the effect signal     Note  This is not related to latency compensation in the host application  This  compensation feature occurs entirely within Space Designer     latency compensation o    Space Designer s processing latency is 128 samples at the original sample rate  and it  doubles at each lower sample rate division  If you set Space Designer s    sample rate    slider  to     2    the processing latency increases to 256 samples  Processing latency does not  increase in surround mode or at sample rates above 44 1 kHz     Using Space Designer s Definition Parameter  The Definition parameter emulates the diffusion of natural reverb patterns  When used  at values of less than 100  it also reduces CPU processing requirements     Note  The Definition steppers are visible below the main display only when you have  loaded C
115. eeded  the frequency band defined by the Center Freq  and  Bandwidth parameters is divided into upper and lower frequency ranges     Speed slider and field  Sets the modulation frequency for the defined frequency band     CF  Center Frequency  Modulation slider and field  Sets the intensity of center frequency  modulation     BW  Band Width  Modulation slider and field  Sets the amount of bandwidth modulation     Graphic display  Shows the frequency band defined by the Center Freq  and Bandwidth  parameters     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 157    158    Center Freq   Frequency  knob and field  Sets the center frequency of the band that you  want to process       Bandwidth knob and field  Sets the width of the frequency band that you want to  process     Super Energy knob and field  Controls the level of the frequency range above the  threshold       High Level slider and field  Blends the frequencies of the original signal   above the  selected frequency band   with the processed signal     Sub Energy and field  Controls the level of the frequency range below the threshold       Low Level slider and field  Blends the frequencies of the original signal   below the  selected frequency band   with the processed signal     Gain slider and field  Sets the output level of the Spectral Gate     Using the Spectral Gate   One way to familiarize yourself with the operation of the Spectral Gate would be to start  with a drum loop  Set the Center Freq  to its minimum  20 Hz  and the Bandwidt
116. enable you to adjust the balance between the direct  dry  and  processed signals  The parameters that are available are dependent on Space Designer   s  input configuration     If you insert Space Designer as mono  mono to stereo  or stereo effect  Space Designer  offers two output sliders   one for the direct signal  and one for the reverb signal     In surround configurations  Space Designer offers four output sliders that together  comprise a small surround output mixer     Mono Stereo Surround            C Bal Rev Dry    T   T max    Space Designer Mono Stereo Output Configuration Parameters     Dry slider  Sets the level of the non effect  dry  signal  Set this to a value of 0  mute  if  Space Designer is inserted in a bus channel  or when using modeling impulse responses  such as speaker simulations          Rev erb  slider  Adjusts the output level of the effect  wet  signal     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 245    246    Space Designer Surround Output Configuration Parameters    Center  slider  Adjusts the output level of the center channel independently of other  surround channels     e Bal ance  slider  Sets the level balance between the front  L C R  and rear  Ls Rs  channels       In 71 ITU surround  the balance pivots around the Lm Rm speakers  taking the  surround angles into account       With 71 SDDS surround  the Lc Rc speakers are considered front speakers     Rev erb  slider  Adjusts the output level of the effect  wet  signal for all channel
117. encies that fall outside these boundaries will  be cut       The length of the horizontal blue bar at the top represents the frequency range  You  can move the entire frequency range by dragging the blue bar  The silver handles  on either end of the blue bar set the Low Frequency and High Frequency values   respectively       You can also use the numeric fields to adjust the frequency values separately       Frequency band faders  Set the level of each frequency band in Filter Bank A  upper  blue faders  or Filter Bank B  lower green faders   You can quickly create complex level  curves by dragging horizontally     drawing     across either row of faders       Formant Shift knob  Moves all bands in both filter banks up or down the frequency  spectrum     Note  The use of Formant Shift can result in the generation of unusual resonant  frequencies   when high Resonance settings are used       Bands value field  Sets the number of frequency bands   up to 20   in each filter bank     e Lowest button  Click to determine whether the lowest filter band acts as bandpass or  highpass filter  In the Bandpass setting  the frequencies below the lowest bands and  above the highest bands are ignored  In the Highpass setting  all frequencies below  the lowest bands are filtered     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    Highest button  Click to determine whether the highest filter band acts as bandpass or  lowpass filter  In the Bandpass setting  the frequencies below the lowest bands and  above the h
118. ents a chattering effect that can be caused by a  rapidly changing side chain level  If the side chain level hovers around the threshold  value rather than clearly exceeding or falling short of it  set the Hold parameter to a  high value to compensate for any rapid volume reductions       Release slider and field  Controls how quickly the volume returns to the original level   Set it to a high value if you want the music mix to slowly fade up after the  announcement     Using the Ducker    The steps below show how to use the Ducker on existing recordings     Note  For technical reasons  the Ducker plug in can be inserted only in output and aux  channel strips     To use the Ducker plug in  Insert the plug in into an aux channel strip     Assign all channel strip outputs that are supposed to    duck     dynamically lower the volume  of the mix  to a bus   the aux channel strip chosen in step 1     Choose the bus that carries the ducking  vocal  signal in the Side Chain menu of the  Ducker plug in     Note  Unlike all other side chain capable plug ins  the Ducker side chain is mixed with  the output signal after passing through the plug in  This ensures that the ducking  side chain signal   the voice over   is heard at the output     Adjust the Ducker parameters     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 95    96    Enveloper    The Enveloper is an unusual processor that lets you shape the attack and release phases  of a signal   the signal s transients  in other words  This makes it a 
119. er      High Shelving  Gain knob and field  Sets the amount of gain applied to the output signal     Input Gain field and slider  Extended Parameters area   Sets the amount of gain applied  to the input signal     Output Gain field and slider  Extended Parameters area   Sets the amount of gain applied  to the output signal     Distortion Effect   The Distortion effect simulates the lo fi  dirty distortion generated by a bipolar transistor   You can use it to simulate playing a musical instrument through a highly overdriven  amplifier  or to create unique distorted sounds        Drive slider and field  Sets the amount of saturation applied to the signal   Display  Shows the impact of parameters on the signal     Tone knob and field  Sets the frequency for the high cut filter  Filtering the harmonically  rich distorted signal produces a softer tone     Output slider and field  Sets the output level  This allows you to compensate for increases  in loudness caused by adding distortion     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects    Distortion Il   Distortion Il emulates the distortion circuit of a Hammond B3 organ  You can use it on  musical instruments to recreate this classic effect  or use it creatively when designing  new sounds        e PreGain knob  Sets the amount of gain applied to the input signal     Drive knob  Sets the amount of saturation applied to the signal       Tone knob  Sets the frequency of the highpass filter  Filtering the harmonically rich  distorted signal produces a
120. er adjustment graphic  Drag the white dot to change the microphone position  and distance  relative to the cabinet  Placement is limited to near field positioning     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Mic pop up menu  You can choose one of the Microphone models from the pop up  menu       Condenser  Emulates the sound of a high end German studio condenser microphone   The sound of condenser microphones is fine  transparent  and well balanced       Dynamic  Emulates the sound of popular American dynamic cardioid microphones   This microphone type sounds brighter and more cutting than the Condenser model   The mid range is boosted  with lower mid frequencies being less pronounced  making  it a good choice for miking rock guitar tones  It is especially useful if you want your  guitar part to cut through other tracks in a mix       Ribbon  Emulates the sound of a ribbon microphone  A ribbon microphone is a type  of dynamic microphone that captures a sound often described as bright or brittle   yet still warm  It is useful for rock  crunch  and clean tones     Tip  Combining multiple microphone types can produce an interesting sound  Duplicate  the guitar track  and insert Amp Designer on both tracks  Select different microphones  in each Amp Designer instance while retaining identical settings for all other parameters   and set track signal levels to taste     Setting Amp Designer s Output Level   The Output slider  or the Output field  in the small interface  is found at the lower 
121. er cutoff frequency value is lower than that of the lowpass cutoff  frequency  only one line is shown  This line represents the frequency band that passes  through the filters   in other words  the filters act as a bandpass filter  In this configuration   the two filters operate serially  meaning that the tap passes through one filter first  then  the other     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    64    If the highpass filter   s cutoff frequency value is above that of the lowpass filter cutoff  frequency  the filter switches from serial operation to parallel operation  meaning that  the tap passes through both filters simultaneously  In this case  the space between the  two cutoff frequencies represents the frequency band being rejected   in other words   the filters act as a band rejection filter     Editing Pan in Delay Designer s Tap Display  The way the Pan parameter is represented in Pan view is entirely dependent on the input  channel configuration   mono to stereo  stereo to stereo  or surround     Note  Pan is not available in mono configurations        In mono input stereo output configurations  all taps are initially panned to the center   To edit the pan position  drag vertically from the center of the tap in the direction you  wish to pan the tap  or taps  A white line extends outward from the center in the direction  you have dragged  reflecting the pan position of the tap  or taps     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Lines above the center position indicate pans to the left  a
122. er to get a feel for how this works       Folded  The start and end levels of the clipped signal are unchanged  but the center  portion is effectively folded in half  halved in the level above the threshold   resulting  in a softer distortion       Cut  The signal is abruptly distorted when the clipping threshold is exceeded  Clipping  that occurs in most digital systems is closest to Cut mode     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects      Displaced  The start  center and end levels of the signal  above the threshold  are  offset  resulting in a distortion which is less severe as signal levels cross the threshold   The center portion of the clipped signal is also softer than in Cut mode     Clip Level slider and field  Sets the point  below the clipping threshold of the channel  strip  at which the signal starts clipping     Mix slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the balance between dry  original   and wet  effect  signals     Clip Distortion  Clip Distortion is a nonlinear distortion effect that produces unpredictable spectra  It can  simulate warm  overdriven tube sounds and can also generate drastic distortions     Clip Distortion features an unusual combination of serially connected filters  The incoming  signal is amplified by the Drive value  passes through a highpass filter  and is then  subjected to nonlinear distortion  Following the distortion  the signal passes through a  lowpass filter  The effect signal is then recombined with the original signal and this m
123. erb  You can  choose from several filter modes  adjust resonance  and also adjust the filter envelope  dynamically over time  See Working with Space Designer s Filter    Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb      Global parameters  After your IR is loaded  these parameters determine how  Space Designer operates on the overall signal and IR  Included are input and output  parameters  delay and volume compensation  predelay  and so on  See Working with  Space Designer s Global Parameters    Working with Space Designer   s Impulse Response Parameters  Space Designer can use either recorded impulse response files or its own synthesized  impulse responses  The circular area to the left of the main display contains the impulse  response parameters  These are used to determine the Impulse Response mode  IR Sample  mode or Synthesized IR mode   load or create impulse responses  and set the sample rate  and length         ample    sample rate  orig 4    IR Sample button and IR Sample menu  Click the IR Sample button to switch to IR Sample  mode  In IRSample mode  an impulse response sample is used to generate reverberation   Click the down arrow next to the IR Sample button to open the IR Sample pop up  menu  in which you can load and manipulate impulse response samples  and record  and edit impulse responses with Impulse Response Utility  See Working in   Space Designer s IR Sample Mode        sample rate    slider and    preserve length    button  The    sample rate    slider
124. erb parameters    The interface is broken down into four parameter areas     Early Reflections parameters  Used to emulate the original signal s first reflections as  they bounce off the walls  ceiling  and floor of a natural room  See GoldVerb Early  Reflections Parameters     Reverb parameters  Control the diffuse reverberations  See GoldVerb Reverb Parameters     Balance ER Reverb slider  Controls the balance between the early reflections and reverb  signal  When the slider is set to either extreme position  the other signal is not heard     Mix slider and field  Determines the balance between the effect  wet  and direct  dry   signals     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects    GoldVerb Early Reflections Parameters  The GoldVerb offers the following Early Reflections parameters          Predelay slider and field  Determines the amount of time between the start of the original  signal and the arrival of the early reflections  Extremely short Predelay settings can  color the sound and make it difficult to pinpoint the position of the signal source  Overly  long Predelay settings can be perceived as an unnatural echo and can divorce the  original signal from its early reflections  leaving an audible gap between them     The optimum Predelay setting depends on the type of input signal   or more precisely   the envelope of the input signal  Percussive signals generally require shorter predelays  than signals where the attack fades in gradually  A good working method is to use the  longes
125. ers a maximum delay time of 10 seconds  This means that if you  load a setting into a project with a slower tempo than the tempo at which it was created   some taps may fall outside the 10 second limit  In such cases  these taps will not be played  but will be retained as part of the setting        e Sync button  Enables or disables synchronized mode       Grid pop up menu  Provides several grid resolutions  which correspond to musical note  durations  The grid resolution  along with the project tempo  determines the length of  each grid increment  As you change grid resolutions  the increments shown in the  Identification bar change accordingly  This also determines a step limitation for all taps     As an example  imagine a project with the current tempo set to 120 beats per minute   The Grid pop up menu value is set to 1 16 notes  At this tempo and grid resolution   each grid increment is 125 milliseconds  ms  apart  If Tap A is currently set to 380 ms   turning on Sync mode would immediately shift Tap A to 375 ms  If you subsequently  moved Tap A forward in time  it would snap to 500 ms  625 ms  750 ms  and so on  At  a resolution of 1 8 notes  the steps are 250 milliseconds apart  so Tap A would  automatically snap to the nearest division  500 ms   and could be moved to 750 ms   1000 ms  1250 ms  and so on       Swing field  Determines how close to the absolute grid position every second grid  increment will be  A Swing setting of 50  means that every grid increment has 
126. ertical line below the Pitch Base field  Transpositions of a fifth upward  Pitch    7    a fourth downward  Pitch      5   or by an octave  Pitch    12  are the most useful   harmonically     G    Formant       As you alter the Pitch parameter  you might notice that the formants don t change   Formants are characteristic emphases of certain frequency ranges  They are static and do  not change with pitch  Formants are responsible for the specific timbre of a given human  voice     The Pitch parameter is expressly used to change the pitch of a voice  not its character  If  you set negative Pitch values for a female soprano voice  you can turn it into an alto voice  without changing the specific character of the singer s voice     The Formant parameter shifts the formants  while maintaining    or independently  altering   the pitch  If you set this parameter to positive values  the singer sounds like  Mickey Mouse  By altering the parameter downward  you can achieve vocals reminiscent  of Darth Vader     Tip  If you set Pitch to 0 semitones  Mix to 50   and Formant to  1  with Robotize turned  off   you can effectively place a singer  with a smaller head  next to the original singer   Both will sing with the same voice  in a choir of two  This doubling of voices is quite  effective  with levels easily controlled by the Mix parameter     Using Vocal Transformer   s Robotize Mode  When Robotize is enabled  Vocal Transformer can augment or diminish the melody  You  can control the 
127. ervals  you can create special effects  Natural articulations of the  performance  such as breath noises  are preserved  Any scale can be defined as a pitch  reference  technically speaking  this is known as a pitch quantization grid   with improperly  intonated notes corrected in accordance with this scale     Note  Polyphonic recordings  such as choirs  and highly percussive signals with prominent  noisy portions can   t be corrected to a specific pitch  Despite this  feel free to try the plug in  on drum signals     203       204    Pitch Correction Parameters  The Pitch Correction effect offers the following parameters        Use Global  Tuning      pitch correction    oo  Range    Ref  Pitch n worm  ars           Response Detune    ict J    Use Global Tuning button  Enable to use the project s Tuning settings for the pitch  correction process  If disabled  you can use the Ref  Pitch field to freely set the desired  reference tuning  See Setting the Pitch Correction Reference Tuning     Normal and Low buttons  These determine the pitch range that is scanned  for notes  that need correction   See Defining the Pitch Correction Effect   s Quantization Grid     Ref  Pitch field  Sets the desired reference tuning  in cents  relative to the root   See  Setting the Pitch Correction Reference Tuning     Root pop up menu and field  Click to choose the root note of the scale from the Root  pop up menu  See Defining the Pitch Correction Effect   s Quantization Grid     Scale pop up 
128. es to the left of the  center positions are synchronized with the host application tempo and include bar  values  triplet values  and more  Values to the right of the center positions are non  synchronized and are displayed in Hertz  cycles per second      Note  The ability to use synchronous bar values could be used to perform a formant  shift every four bars on a cycled one bar percussion part  for example  Alternatively   you could perform the same formant shift on every eighth note triplet within the same  part  Either method can generate interesting results and can lead to new ideas  or add  new life to old audio material     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Output Parameters  The Output section provides control over the type  stereo width  and level of signal that  is sent from the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator     Level    Stereo Mode     a        Stereo Width         Signal menu  Determines the signal that is sent to the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator main  outputs  You can choose among the following settings       Voc oder   Choose to hear the vocoder effect      Syn thesis   Choose to hear only the synthesizer signal      Anaj lysis   Choose to hear only the analysis signal    Note  The last two settings are mainly useful for monitoring purposes       Level slider  Controls the volume of the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator output signal     Chapter 6 Filter Effects      Stereo Mode pop up menu  Sets the input output mode of the EVOC 20 Filterbank  The  choices are m s  mono input to stereo outpu
129. est and highest amplitudes  Dynamics  processors enable you to adjust the dynamic range of individual audio files  tracks  or an  overall project  This can be to increase the perceived loudness and or to highlight the  most important sounds  while ensuring that softer sounds are not lost in the mix     This chapter covers the following     Types of Dynamics Processors  p  86     Adaptive Limiter  p  87     Compressor  p  88   DeEsser  p  92   Ducker  p  94     Enveloper  p  96     Expander  p  98     Limiter  p  99     Multipressor  p  100   Noise Gate  p  103     Silver Compressor  p  106   Silver Gate  p  107     Surround Compressor  p  107     85       86    Types of Dynamics Processors  There are four types of dynamics processors included in Logic Pro  These are each used  for different audio processing tasks       Compressors  Logic Pro features a number of downward compressors  These behave  like an automatic volume control  lowering the volume whenever it rises above a certain  level  called the threshold  So  why would you want to reduce the dynamic level     By reducing the highest parts of the signal  called peaks  a compressor raises the overall  level of the signal  increasing the perceived volume  This gives the signal more focus  by making the louder  foreground  parts stand out  while keeping the softer background  parts from becoming inaudible  Compression also tends to make sounds tighter or  punchier because transients are emphasized  depending on attack and
130. eter       Direction knob and field  Determines the pan position for the middle   the center of  the stereo base   of the recorded stereo signal  See Using the Direction Mixer   s Direction  Parameter    Using the Direction Mixer   s Spread Parameter  The Direction Mixer   s Spread parameter behavior changes when fed LR or MS signals   These differences are outlined below     When working with LR signals  the following applies to the Direction Mixer   s Spread  parameter     At a neutral value of 1  the left side of the signal is positioned precisely to the left and  the right side precisely to the right  As you decrease the Spread value  the two sides  move toward the center of the stereo image     A value of 0 produces a summed mono signal   both sides of the input signal are routed  to the two outputs at the same level  At values greater than 1  the stereo base is  extended out to an imaginary point beyond the spatial limits of the speakers    The following applies when working with MS signals     e Values of 1 or higher increase the level of the side signal  making it louder than the  middle signal       At a value of 2  you hear only the side signal     Chapter 7 Imaging Processors 163    164    Using the Direction Mixer   s Direction Parameter  When Direction is set to a value of 0  the midpoint of the stereo base in a stereo recording  is perfectly centered within the mix     The following applies when working with LR signals     At 90    the center of the stereo base 
131. etric EQ    Gain 0 0dB 4  Frequency      980Hz a    0 74  amp          Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of cut or boost     Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency     Q Factor slider and field  Adjusts the Q  bandwidth      Silver EQ    The Silver EQ includes three bands   a high shelving EQ  a parametric EQ  and a low  shelving EQ  You can adjust the cutoff frequencies for the high shelving and low shelving  EQs  You can adjust the center frequency  gain  and Q for the parametric EQ      x  Inst 1  p View v ShowCS v   Showinsert      Bypass  lt   gt   default    Silver EQ  High Shelf    00de    High Frequency 9500Hz  Frequency 920Hz  0 7  0 0dB    0 0dB    Low Frequency 53Hz         High Shelf slider and field  Sets the level of the high shelving EQ     High Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency for the high shelving EQ     Frequency slider and field  Sets the center frequency of the parametric EQ       Q Factor slider and field  Adjusts the range  bandwidth  of the parametric EQ     Chapter5 Equalizers 129    130      Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of cut or boost for the parametric EQ   e Low Shelf slider and field  Sets the level of the low shelving EQ       Low Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency for the low shelving EQ     Chapter5 Equalizers       Filter Effects 6    Filters are used to emphasize or suppress frequencies in an audio signal  resulting in a  change to the tonal color of the audio     Logic Pro
132. ets the ratio between the source and  distorted signals  The Bright Fat switch changes between two fixed  high shelving filter frequencies  Blue and red LEDs indicate each  switch position  respectively        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 43    Stompbox Description    Fuzz Machine An American    fuzz    distortion effect  Fuzz controls the input gain   Overall output gain is set with Level  The Tone knob increases treble   while simultaneously rolling off low frequencies  as you move it to  higher values        Grinder Grinder is a lo fi  dirty    metal    distortion  Grind sets the amount of  drive applied to the input signal  Tone is controlled with the Filter  knob  making the sound harsher and more crunchy at higher values   The Full Scoop switch alternates between two fixed Gain Q filter  settings  At the Full position  filtering is less pronounced than at  the Scoop position  Overall output level is controlled with the Level  knob        Happy Face Fuzz A softer  full sounding distortion effect  Fuzz sets the amount of  saturation applied to the input signal  Volume sets the output level        Hi Drive An overdrive effect that can emphasize high frequency content in  the signal  Level controls the effect output  The Treble Full switch  sets a fixed shelving frequency  allowing either the treble portion  or the full range input signal to be processed     Monster Fuzz A saturated  somewhat harsh distortion  Roar sets the amount of  gain applied to the input signal  Growl se
133. ettings menu  which you use to load a setting for the  entire Pedalboard plug in  this feature can be used to load a setting for a specific stompbox  type     Import Mode       To activate or deactivate import mode   Click the Import Mode button to show all pedals used in the most recent Pedalboard  setting  When the Import Mode button is active  the Pedal Browser switches to an alternate  view mode that displays imported settings  When import mode is inactive  the normal  Pedal Browser view is shown     To import pedal settings into the Pedal Browser  Click the Import Mode button to activate import mode  Note that the View menu changes  to the Select Setting button     Note  If this is your first attempt to import settings  a dialog opens where you can select  a setting to import     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Click the Select Setting button and select a setting  then click Open  Dependent on the  chosen setting  one or more stompboxes appear in the Pedal Browser  The name of the  imported setting is shown at the bottom of the Pedal Browser     To add an imported pedal to the Pedal area  Do one of the following     Drag the stompbox that you want to add from the Pedal Browser to the appropriate  Pedal area position  This can be to the left  to the right  or in between existing pedals     Ensure that no pedal is selected in the Pedal area  then double click a stompbox in the  Pedal Browser to add it to the right of all existing effects in the Pedal area     Note  The parame
134. etween   the generated and original signals with the Wet and Dry  sliders     Use the High and Low parameters to define the two frequency bands  which SubBass  uses to generate tones  High Center and Low Center define the center frequency of each  band  and High Bandwidth and Low Bandwidth define the width of each frequency band     The High Ratio and Low Ratio knobs define the transposition amount for the generated  signal in each band  This is expressed as a ratio of the original signal  For example  Ratio   2  transposes the signal down one octave     Important  Within each frequency band  the filtered signal should have a reasonably  stable pitch in order to be analyzed correctly     In general  narrow bandwidths produce the best results  because they avoid unwanted  intermodulations  Set High Center a fifth higher than Low Center  which means a factor  of 1 5 for the center frequency  Derive the sub bass to be synthesized from the existing  bass portion of the signal  and transpose by one octave in both bands  Ratio   2   Do not  overdrive the process or you will introduce distortion  If you hear frequency gaps  move  one or both Center frequency knobs  or widen the Bandwidth of one or both frequency  ranges a little     Tip  Be prudent when using SubBass  and compare the extreme low frequency content  of your mixes with other productions  It is very easy to go overboard with it     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities    257       Utilities and Tools 14    The t
135. evel meter  Shows the overall output level     Using the Multipressor   In the graphic display  the blue bars show the gain change   not merely the gain  reduction    as with a standard compressor  The gain change display is a composite value  consisting of the compression reduction  plus the expander reduction  plus the auto gain  compensation  plus the gain make up     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Setting Multipressor Compression Parameters   The Compression Threshold and Compression Ratio parameters are the key parameters  for controlling compression  Usually the most useful combinations of these two settings  are a low Compression Threshold with a low Compression Ratio  or a high Compression  Threshold with a high Compression Ratio     Setting Multipressor Downward Expansion Parameters   The Expansion Threshold  Expansion Ratio  and Expansion Reduction parameters are the  key parameters for controlling downward expansion  They determine the strength of the  expansion applied to the chosen range     Setting Multipressor Peak RMS and Envelope Parameters   Adjusting the parameter between Peak  0 ms  minimum value  and RMS  root mean  square    200 ms  maximum value  is dependent on the type of signal you want to  compress  An extremely short Peak detection setting is suitable for compression of short  and high peaks of low power  which do not typically occur in music  The RMS detection  method measures the power of the audio material over time and thus works much more  m
136. evels will result in audible reflections  patterns and discreet echoes       Ramp Time field  Adjusts the length of time elapsed between the Initial and End Density  levels     End Level field  Sets the density of the reverb tail  If you select an End Level value that  is too low  the reverb tail will sound grainy  You may also find that the stereo spectrum  is affected by lower values     Reflection Shape slider  Determines the steepness  shape  of the early reflection clusters  as they bounce off the walls  ceiling  and furnishings of the virtual space  Small values  result in clusters with a sharp contour  and large values result in an exponential slope  and a smoother sound  This is handy when recreating rooms constructed of different  materials  Reflection Shape  in conjunction with suitable settings for the envelopes   density  and early reflection will assist you in creating rooms of almost any shape and  material     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 237    Working with Space Designer s EQ   Space Designer features a four band EQ comprised of two parametric mid bands plus  two shelving filters  one low shelving filter and one high shelving filter   You can edit the  EQ parameters numerically in the parameter bar  or graphically in the main display     Input Output    IR Sample        sample rate  orig                EQ On Off button Individual EQ band  buttons      EQ On Off button  Enables or disables the entire EQ section      Individual EQ band buttons  
137. everb effect     Additional Resources  Along with the documentation that comes with Logic Pro  there are a variety of other  resources you can use to find out more     Release Notes and New Features  Each application offers detailed documentation that covers new or changed features and  functions  This documentation can be accessed in the following location       Click the Release Notes and New Features links in the application Help menu     Logic Pro Website  For general information and updates  as well as the latest news on Logic Pro  go to          httg pple com logicpro    Apple Service and Support Websites   For software updates and answers to the most frequently asked questions for all Apple  products  go to the general Apple Support webpage  You ll also have access to product  specifications  reference documentation  and Apple and third party product technical  articles     1pple com support       Preface An Introduction to the Logic Pro Effects    For software updates  documentation  discussion forums  and answers to the most  frequently asked questions for Logic Pro  go to     e http   www apple com support logicpro    For discussion forums for all Apple products from around the world  where you can search  for an answer  post your question  or answer other users    questions  go to       http   discussions apple com    Preface An Introduction to the Logic Pro Effects       Amps and Pedals 1    Logic Pro features an extensive collection of guitar and bass amplifiers 
138. fect Order Buttons     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 153    154    Wah parameters  Provide control over the type and tone of the wah wah effect  See  Wah Parameters     Auto Wah parameters  Set the depth and envelope times for the automatic wah wah  effect  See Auto Wah Parameters     Fuzz parameters  Set the compression ratio  and control the tone and level of the  integrated distortion circuit  See Fuzz Parameters     Effect Order Buttons  These buttons determine the signal flow of the Fuzz Wah effect  Click Wah Fuzz or  Fuzz Wah to choose the desired flow              Note that the Fuzz Wah plug in features an integrated compression circuit  The compressor  always precedes the fuzz effect  When Wah Fuzz is selected  the compressor is positioned  between the wah wah and the fuzz effect  When Fuzz Wah is selected  however  the  compressor is placed first in the signal chain     Wah Parameters  This group of parameters controls the tone and behavior of the wah wah effect     a       Wah Mode pop up menu  Includes the following Wah Wah effect settings   Off  Wah Wah effect is disabled     ResoLP  Resonating Lowpass Filter   In this mode  the Wah Wah works as a  resonance capable lowpass filter  At the minimum pedal position  only low frequencies  can pass     ResoHP  Resonating Highpass Filter   In this mode  the Wah Wah works as a  resonance capable highpass filter  At the maximum pedal position  only high  frequencies can pass     Peak  In this mode  the Wah Wah works as a peak  
139. for interesting tempo  pitch  and retro digital  sounding effects     If you are running Space Designer in a project that uses a higher sample rate than the  impulse response  you may also want to reduce the impulse response sample rate  Make  sure the    preserve length    function is enabled  This cuts CPU power consumption without  compromising reverb quality  There is no loss in reverb quality  because the impulse  response does not benefit from the higher project sample rate     You can make similar adjustments while running in Synthesized IR mode  Most typical  reverb sounds don t feature an excessive amount of high frequency content  If you were  running at 96 kHz  for example  you would need to make use of some deep lowpass  filtering to obtain the mellow frequency response characteristics of many reverb sounds   A better approach would be to first reduce the high frequencies by 1 2 or even 1 4 using  the    sample rate    slider  and then apply the lowpass filter  This conserves a considerable  amount of CPU power     Setting Impulse Response Lengths in Space Designer  You can use the Length parameter to set the length of the impulse response    sampled  or synthesized     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    All envelopes are automatically calculated as a percentage of the overall length  which  means that if this parameter is altered  your envelope curves will stretch or shrink to fit   saving you time and effort     When you are using an impulse respons
140. for peaks     Remove DC checkbox  Extended Parameters area   Enable to activate a highpass filter  that removes direct current  DC  from the signal  DC can be introduced by lower quality  audio hardware     Compressor    The Compressor is designed to emulate the sound and response of a professional level  analog  hardware  compressor  It tightens up your audio by reducing sounds that exceed  a certain threshold level  smoothing out the dynamics and increasing the overall  volume    the perceived loudness  Compression helps bring the key parts of a track or    mix into focus  while preventing softer parts from becoming inaudible  It is probably the  most versatile and widely used sound shaping tool in mixing  next to EQ     You can use the Compressor with individual tracks  including vocal  instrumental  and    effects tracks  as well as on the overall mix  Usually you insert the Compressor directly  into a channel strip     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Compressor Parameters  The Compressor offers the following parameters          Circuit Type pop up menu  Choose the type of circuit emulated by the Compressor  The  choices are Platinum  Class ic  A_R  Class ic  A_U  VCA  FET  and Opto  optical        Side Chain Detection pop up menu  Determines if the Compressor uses the maximum  level of each side chained signal  Max  or the summed level of all side chained signals   Sum  to exceed or fall below the threshold     e If either of the stereo channels exceeds or falls below t
141. from  a higher to a lower value     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 195    196    Modulating the Ringshifter with the LFO   The oscillator Frequency and Dry Wet parameters can be modulated with the LFO   and  the envelope follower  see Modulating the Ringshifter with the Envelope Follower   The  oscillator frequency even allows modulation through the 0 Hz point  thus changing the  oscillation direction  The LFO produces continuous  cycled control signals        Power button  Turns the LFO on or off and enables the following parameters     Symmetry and Smooth sliders and fields  These controls  on either side of the Waveform  display  change the shape of the LFO waveform     Waveform display  The LFO waveform display provides visual feedback about the  waveform shape     Rate knob and field  Sets the  waveform cycle  speed of the LFO     Sync button  Synchronizes the LFO cycles  LFO rate  with the project tempo  using  musical note values     Controlling the Ringshifter Output Parameters  The output parameters are used to set the balance between the effect and input signals  and also to set the width and feedback of the Ringshifter          Dry Wet knob and field  Sets the mix ratio of the dry input signal and the wet effect  signal     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    Feedback knob and field  Sets the amount of the signal that is routed back to the effect  input  Feedback adds an edge to the Ringshifter sound and is useful for a variety of  special effects  It produces a rich phasi
142. from the Pedal area     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 41    42    Remove all stompboxes from the Pedal area  This automatically removes an existing Mixer  utility     To remove an effect from the second bus  Click the name of the pedal  or on either of the gray lines  in the Routing area     Note  The removal of all effects from Bus B does not remove the second bus  The Mixer  utility pedal remains in the Pedal area  even when a single stompbox  effect  is in the  Pedal area  This allows parallel routing of wet and dry signals  Only when all pedal effects  are removed from the Pedal area is the Mixer utility  and second bus  removed     To determine the split point between busses   When more than one bus is active  a number of dots appear along the    cables     gray  lines  in the Routing area  These represent the output  the socket  of the pedal to the  lower left of the dot  Click the appropriate dot to determine where the split point   where  the signal is routed between busses  A cable appears between the busses when you click  a dot     Note  You can not create a split point directly before  or after  the Mixer utility     To switch between a Splitter utility and bus split point  Double click a bus split point dot in the Routing area to replace it with a Splitter utility   The Splitter utility is shown in the Pedal area     Double click the Splitter label in the Routing area to replace the Splitter utility with a bus  split point dot  The Splitter utility is removed from th
143. gnal          Intensity slider and field  Determines the modulation amount       Speed knob and field  Defines the frequency of the built in LFO  and therefore the speed  of the modulation       Channel Delay slider and field  Determines the delay time in samples     e Mix slider and field  Sets the balance between the effect and input signals     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    201    202    Tremolo Effect   The Tremolo effect modulates the amplitude of the incoming signal  resulting in periodic  volume changes  You ll recognize this effect from vintage guitar combo amps  where it  is sometimes incorrectly referred to as vibrato   The graphic display shows all parameters   except Rate          Depth slider and field  Determines the modulation amount     Waveform display  Shows the resulting waveform     Rate knob and field  Sets the frequency of the LFO     e Symmetry and Smoothing knobs and fields  Use these to alter the shape of the LFO  waveform     If Symmetry is set to 50  and Smoothing to 0   the LFO waveform has a rectangular  shape  This means that the timing of the highest and lowest volume signals is equal   with the switch between both states occurring abruptly     e Phase knob and field  Available only in stereo and surround instances  Controls the  phase relationship between the individual channel modulations  At 0  modulation  values are reached simultaneously for all channels  Values of 180 or    180 indicate the  greatest possible distance between the modulati
144. gs     American Bright  Based on the American Basic amp  this model emphasizes the  upper mid frequencies  from 4 5 kHz upward      New American Basic  1980s era American bass amp  well suited for blues and rock  recordings     New American Bright  Based on the New American Basic amp  this model strongly  emphasizes the frequency range above 2 kHz  Well suited for rock and heavy metal     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Top Class DI Warm  Famous DI box simulation  well suited for reggae and pop  recordings  Mid frequencies  in the range between 500 and 5000 Hz  are  de emphasized     Top Class DI Deep  Based on the Top Class DI Warm  this model is well suited for funk  and fusion  The mid frequency range is strongest around 700 Hz          Top Class DI Mid  Based on the Top Class DI Warm  this model features an almost  linear frequency range  with no frequencies emphasized  It is suitable for blues  rock   and jazz recordings       Pre Gain slider  Sets the pre amplification level of the input signal     Bass  Mid  and Treble sliders  Adjusts the bass  mid  and treble levels     Mid Freq slider  Sets the center frequency of the mid band  between 200 Hz and 3000 Hz        Output Level slider  Sets the final output level for Bass Amp     Guitar Amp Pro   Guitar Amp Pro can simulate the sound of popular guitar amplifiers and the speakers  used with them  You can process guitar signals directly  which enables you to reproduce  the sound of your guitar through a number of high qual
145. h is activated or by activating Match after a new spectrum has been loaded   any existing changes to the filter curve are discarded  and Apply is set to 100      By default  the Apply slider is set to 100  when you learn the frequency curve of an audio  signal  In many cases you may want to lower it slightly to avoid extreme spectral changes  to your mix  It is also recommended that you use the Smoothing slider to adjust the  spectral detail of the generated EQ curve     Using the Match EQ Shortcut Menu  Control click  or right click  either Learn button to open a shortcut menu  This offers  commands that can be applied to the spectrum of the template or the current material     e Clear Current Material Spectrum  Clears the current spectrum     Chapter5 Equalizers 125    126    Copy Current Spectrum  Copies the current spectrum to the Clipboard  this can be used  by any Match EQ instance in the current project        Paste Current Spectrum  Pastes the Clipboard contents to the current Match EQ instance     Load Current Material Spectrum from setting file  Loads the spectrum from a stored  setting file       Generate Current Material Spectrum from audio file  Generates a frequency spectrum for  an audio file that you have chosen     Editing the Match EQ Filter Curve   You can graphically edit the filter curve in the graphic display by adjusting the various  points shown in each band  As you drag  the current values appear in a small box inside  the graphic display  allowing yo
146. h to its  maximum  20 000 Hz  value so that the entire frequency range is processed  Turn up the  Super Energy and Sub Energy knobs  one at a time  then try different Threshold settings   This should give you a good sense of how different Threshold levels affect the sound of  Super Energy and Sub Energy  When you come across a sound that you like or consider  useful  narrow the Bandwidth drastically  gradually increase the Center Freq   and then  use the Low Level and High Level sliders to mix in some treble and bass from the original  signal  At lower Speed settings  turn up the CF Mod  or BW Mod  knobs     Follow these steps to acquaint yourself with the Spectral Gate  Set the frequency band you want to process by using the Center Freq  and Bandwidth  parameters     The graphic display visually indicates the band defined by these two parameters     After the frequency band is defined  use the Threshold parameter to set the appropriate  level     All incoming signals above and below the threshold level are divided into upper and  lower frequency ranges     Use the Super Energy knob to control the level of the frequencies above the Threshold   and use the Sub Energy knob to control the level of the frequencies below the Threshold     You can mix the frequencies that fall outside the frequency band  defined by the Center  Freq  and Bandwidth parameters  with the processed signal     a Use the Low Level slider to blend the frequencies below the defined frequency band  with the 
147. he Threshold  both channels  are compressed     If Sum is chosen  the combined level of both channels must exceed the Threshold  before compression occurs     Gain Reduction meter  Shows the amount of compression in real time     e Attack knob and field  Determines the amount of time it takes for the compressor to  react when the signal exceeds the threshold       Compression curve display  Shows the compression curve created by the combination  of Ratio and Knee parameter values  Input  level  is shown on the x axis and output   level  on the y axis    e Release knob and field  Determines the amount of time it takes for the compressor to  stop reducing the signal after the signal level falls below the threshold       Auto button  When the Auto button is active  the release time dynamically adjusts to  the audio material       Ratio slider and field  Sets the compression ratio   the ratio of signal reduction when  the threshold is exceeded       Knee slider and field  Determines the strength of compression at levels close to the  threshold  Lower values result in more severe immediate compression  hard knee    Higher values result in gentler compression  soft knee      Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 89    90    Compressor Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level   signals above this  threshold value are reduced in level       Peak RMS buttons  Determines whether signal analysis is with the Peak or RMS method   when using the Platinum circuit type     Gain slider an
148. he graphic display  Each band has a pivot point  a small circle on  the curve  at the location of the band   s frequency  you can adjust the Q or width of the  band by dragging the pivot point vertically     You can also adjust the decibel scale of the graphic display by vertically dragging either  the left or right edge of the display  where the dB scale is shown  when the Analyzer is  not active  When the Analyzer is active  dragging the left edge adjusts the linear dB scale   and dragging the right edge adjusts the Analyzer dB scale     To increase the resolution of the EQ curve display in the most interesting area around  the zero line  drag the dB scale  on the left side of the graphic display  upward  Drag  downward to decrease the resolution     Using the Linear Phase EQ Analyzer   The Analyzer  when active  makes uses of a mathematical process called a Fast Fourier  Transform  FFT  to provide a real time curve of all frequency components in the incoming  signal  This is superimposed over any EQ curves you have set  The Analyzer curve uses  the same scale as the EQ curves  making it easy to recognize important frequencies in  the incoming audio  This also simplifies the task of setting EQ curves to raise or lower the  levels of frequencies or frequency ranges     The bands derived from FFT analysis are divided in accordance with the frequency linear  principle   there are more bands in higher octaves than in lower ones     Chapter5 Equalizers    As soon as the Analyzer
149. her fidelity than the Vintage EQ  with tighter lows  and crisper highs  This EQ is useful if you want to brighten your  tone and reduce distortion        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    EQ type Description    Modern Based on a digital EQ unit popular in the 1980s and 1990s  This EQ  is useful for sculpting the hyped highs  booming lows  and scooped  mids associated with the era s rock and metal music styles        Boutique Replicates the tone section of a    retro modern    boutique amp  It  excels at precise EQ adjustments  though its tone may be cleaner  than desired when used with vintage amplifiers  This EQ is a good  choice if you want a cleaner  brighter sound        Using Amp Designer   s Gain  Presence  and Master Controls   The amp parameters include controls for the input gain  presence  and master output   The Gain knob is found to the left in the knobs section and the Presence and Master  knobs are to the right     Gain Presence Master       e Gain knob  Sets the amount of pre amplification applied to the input signal  This control  affects various amp models differently  For example  when you are using the British  Amp  the maximum gain setting produces a powerful crunch sound  When you are  using the Vintage British Head or Modern British Head  the same gain setting produces  heavy distortion  suitable for lead solos       Presence knob  Adjusts the high frequency range   above the range of the Treble  control  The Presence parameter affects only the output  Master
150. hold for all metering tools in the MultiMeter  as follows       Analyzer  A small yellow segment above each 1 3 octave level bar indicates the most  recent peak level       Goniometer  All illuminated pixels are held during a peak hold       Correlation Meter  The horizontal area around the white correlation indicator denotes  phase correlation deviations in real time  in both directions  A vertical red line to the  left of the correlation indicator shows the maximum negative phase deviation value   You can reset this line by clicking on it during playback       Level Meter  A small yellow segment above each stereo level bar indicates the most  recent peak level       Hold Time pop up menu  When peak hold is active  sets the hold time for all metering  tools to 2  4  or 6 seconds   or infinite     e Reset button  Click to reset the peak hold segments of all metering tools     Surround MultiMeter   The surround version of the MultiMeter is specifically designed for analysis and metering  of multichannel surround files  You can view either the Analyzer  Goniometer  or Correlation  Meter results in the main display area  Use the controls on the left side of the interface  to switch the view and set other MultiMeter parameters  The  Peak RMS  Level Meter is  visible on the right     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Although you can insert the Surround MultiMeter directly into any channel strip  it is more  commonly used in the master channel strip of the host application   when you ar
151. hold time for all metering  tools to 2  4  or 6 seconds   or infinite       Reset button  Click to reset the peak hold segments of all metering tools     Tuner   You can tune instruments connected to your system with the Tuner utility  This ensures  that your external instrument recordings will be in tune with any software instruments   samples  or existing recordings in your projects     Precision button Graphic tuning display    Keynote Octave displays    Tuning adjustment slider  and field       e Precision button  The Graphic tuning display defaults to a linear scale  Enable the Precision  button to change the scaling so that it stretches outwards from the center       Graphic tuning display  Indicates the pitch of the note in the semicircular area around  the Keynote Octave displays  At the centered  12 o clock  position  the note is correctly  tuned  If the indicator moves to the left of center  the note is flat  If the indicator moves  to the right of center  the note is sharp     The numbers around the edge of the display show the variance  in cents  from the  target pitch  The range is marked in single semitone steps for the first 6 semitones   sharp or flat   Thereafter  larger increments are shown     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Keynote Octave displays  The upper  Keynote display shows the target pitch of the note  being played  the closest tuned pitch   The lower  Octave display indicates the octave  that the incoming note falls into  This matches the MIDI octave 
152. ht Link button is not enabled     LFO Left Right Link button  Available only in stereo and surround instances  it links the  modulation rates of the left and right stereo channels  Adjustment of either Rate knob  will affect the other channels     Chapter9 Modulation Effects      LFO Phase knob and field  Available only in stereo and surround instances  it controls  the phase relationship between individual channel modulations       At 0    the extreme values of the modulation are achieved simultaneously for all  channels       180   or    180   is equal to the greatest possible distance between the modulation  phases of the channels     Note  The LFO Phase parameter is available only if the LFO Left Right Link button is  active       Distribution pop up menu  Available only in surround instances  it defines how the phase  offsets between the individual channels are distributed in the surround field  You can  choose from    circular        leftesright        fronteorear        random     and    new random     distributions     Note  When you load a setting that uses the    random    option  the saved phase offset  value is recalled  If you want to randomize the phase setting again  choose    new random     from the Distribution pop up menu       Volume Mod ulation  slider and field  Determines the impact that LFO modulation has  on the amplitude of the effect signal       Output Mix slider and field  Determines the balance between dry and wet signals       All Pass button  Ex
153. icking the corresponding On button  to the left  The On button is red when active     Note  The Effects section is placed before the Presence and Master controls in the signal  flow  and receives the preamplified  pre Master signal     Tremolo  Vibrato  and Reverb are described in the following sections   e Using Guitar Amp Pro s Tremolo and Vibrato Effects    e Using Guitar Amp Pro   s Reverb Effect    Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    33    Using Guitar Amp Pro   s Tremolo and Vibrato Effects   Tremolo and vibrato are controlled by an On button  the FX pop up menu  the Depth  and Speed knobs  and the Sync button in the Effects section  Tremolo modulates the  amplitude or volume of the sound  and vibrato modulates the pitch      FX pop up menu  You can choose either Tremolo or Vibrato      Depth knob  Sets the intensity of the modulation     e Speed knob  Sets the speed of the modulation in Hertz  Lower settings produce a smooth  and floating sound  while higher settings produce a rotor like effect     Sync button  When the Sync button is turned on  the modulation speed is synchronized  to the project tempo  You can adjust the Speed knob to select bar  beat  and musical  note values  including triplet and dotted notes   When the Sync button is turned off   the modulation speed can be set to any available value with the Speed knob     Using Guitar Amp Pro   s Reverb Effect   Reverb is controlled by an On button  the Reverb pop up menu  and a Level knob in the  Reverb section near 
154. ield  Determines the reverb time of the high band  Most natural  rooms have a reverb time somewhere in the range of 1 to 3 seconds  This time is reduced  by absorbent surfaces  such as carpet and curtains  and soft or dense furnishings  such  as sofas  armchairs  cupboards  and tables  Large empty halls or churches have reverb  times of up to 8 seconds  with some cavernous or cathedral like venues extending  beyond that     PlatinumVerb Output Parameters  The PlatinumVerb offers the following Output parameters          Dry slider and field  Controls the amount of the original signal       Wet slider and field  Controls the amount of the effect signal     224 Chapter 11 Reverb Effects    SilverVerb   The SilverVerb is similar to the AVerb  but it provides an additional LFO that can modulate  the reverberated signal  It also includes a high cut and a low cut filter  allowing you to  filter frequencies from the reverb signal  High frequencies usually sound somewhat  unpleasant  hamper speech intelligibility  or mask the overtones of the original signals   Long reverb tails with a lot of bottom end generally result in an indistinct mix        Predelay slider and field  Determines the time between the original signal and the reverb  signal     Reflectivity slider and field  Defines how reflective the imaginary walls  ceiling  and floor  are     Room Size slider and field  Defines the dimensions of a simulated room     Density Time slider and field  Determines both the density and 
155. ighest bands are ignored  In the Lowpass setting  all frequencies above the  highest bands are filtered          Resonance knob  Determines the basic sonic character of both filter banks  Increasing  Resonance emphasizes the center frequency of each band  Low settings result in a  softer character  high settings result in a sharper  brighter character     Boost A and B knobs  Set the amount of boost   or cut   applied to the frequency bands  in Filter Bank A or B  This allows you to compensate for the reduction in volume caused  by lowering the level of one or more bands  If you use Boost to set the  level  mix  relationship between the filter banks  you can use Fade A B  see    Fade AB slider    below   to alter the tonal color  but not the levels     Slope pop up menu  Sets the amount of filter attenuation applied to all filters in both  filter banks  Choices are 1  6 dB Oct   and 2  12 dB Oct    1 sounds softer  2 sounds  tighter     Fade AB slider  Crossfades between Filter Bank A and Filter Bank B  At the top position   only Bank A is audible  At the bottom position  only Bank B is audible  In the middle  position  the signals passing through both banks are evenly mixed     EVOC 20 Filterbank Modulation Parameters   The Modulation section offers two LFOs  The LFO Shift parameters on the left side control  the Formant Shift parameter  The LFO Fade parameters on the right side control the  Fade AB parameter     E OE  sae    Intensity   5 Intensity         LFO Shift Intensi
156. ight  channels     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator    The EVOC 20 TrackOscillator is a vocoder with a monophonic pitch tracking oscillator   The tracking oscillator tracks  or follows  the pitch of a monophonic input signal  If the  input signal is a sung vocal melody  the individual note pitches are tracked and mirrored   or played  by the synthesis engine     The EVOC 20 TrackOscillator features two formant filter banks  an analysis bank  and a  synthesis filter bank  Each offers multiple input options     You can capture an analysis signal source by using the audio arriving at the input of the  channel strip that the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator is inserted in  or by using a side chained  signal from another channel strip     The synthesis source can be derived from the audio input of the channel strip that the  EVOC 20 TrackOscillator is inserted in  a side chain signal  or the tracking oscillator     As you can freely select both the analysis and synthesis input signals  the EVOC 20  TrackOscillator is not limited to pitch tracking effects  It is extremely useful for unusual  filter effects  For example  you could filter an orchestral recording on one channel strip  with train noises side chained from another channel strip  Another great use is for  processing drum loops with side chained signals  such as other drum loops or rhythmic  guitar  clavinet and piano parts     What Is a Vocoder    The word vocoder is an abbreviation for VOice enCODER  A vocoder analyzes the sonic  characte
157. ignal with  the original signal        e Semi Tones slider and field  Sets the pitch shift value in semitones       Cents slider and field  Controls detuning of the pitch shift value in cents  1 100th of a  semitone        Drums  Speech  and Vocals buttons  Select one of three optimized algorithms for common  types of audio material       Drums  Maintains the groove  rhythmic feel  of the source signal       Speech  Provides a balance between both the rhythmic and harmonic aspects of the  signal  This is suitable for complex signals such as spoken word recordings  rap music   and other hybrid signals such as rhythm guitar       Vocals  Retains the intonation of the source  making it well suited for signals that  are inherently harmonic or melodious  such as string pads     e Mix slider and field  Sets the balance between the effect and original signals     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects    207    208      Timing pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Determines how timing is derived  by  following the selected algorithm  Preset   by analyzing the incoming signal  Auto   or  by using the settings of the Delay  Crossfade  and Stereo Link parameters  described  below  Manual      Note  The following three parameters are active only when    Manual    is chosen in the  Timing pop up menu        Delay slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the amount of delay applied to  the input signal  The lower the frequencies of the input signal  the higher  longer  a  delay time you sho
158. ilance  from the signal     The advantage of using the DeEsser rather than an EQ to cut high frequencies is that it  compresses the signal dynamically  rather than statically  This prevents the sound from  becoming darker when no sibilance is present in the signal  The DeEsser has extremely  fast attack and release times     When using the DeEsser  you can set the frequency range being compressed  the  Suppressor frequency  independently of the frequency range being analyzed  the Detector  frequency   The two ranges can be easily compared in the DeEsser   s Detector and  Suppressor frequency range displays    The Suppressor frequency range is reduced in level for as long as the Detector frequency  threshold is exceeded     The DeEsser does not use a frequency dividing network   a crossover utilizing lowpass  and highpass filters  Rather  it isolates and subtracts the frequency band  resulting in no  alteration of the phase curve     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    The Detector parameters are on the left side of the DeEsser window  and the Suppressor  parameters are on the right  The center section includes the Detector and Suppressor  displays and the Smoothing slider        DeEsser Detector Section  Detector Frequency knob and field  Sets the frequency range for analysis     Detector Sensitivity knob and field  Sets the degree of responsiveness to the input signal     Monitor pop up menu  Choose Det ector  to monitor the isolated Detector signal   Sup pressor  to monitor th
159. image  Clicking  these buttons reverses the tap position from left to right  or vice versa  For example  if  a tap is set to 55  left  clicking the flip button will swap it to 55  right     Chapter 2 Delay Effects      Pan field  Controls the pan position for mono input signals  stereo balance for stereo  input signals  and surround angle when used in surround configurations     e Pan displays a percentage between 100   full left  and    100   full right   which  represents the pan position or balance of the tap  A value of 0  represents the center  panorama position       When used in surround  a surround panner replaces the percentage representation   For more information  see          igner in Surround        rking with Delay De    Spread field  When a stereo to stereo or stereo to surround instance of Delay Designer  is used  Spread sets the width of the stereo spread for the selected tap       Mute button  Mutes or unmutes the selected tap       Level field  Determines the output level for the selected tap     Editing Delay Designer Taps with the Shortcut Menu  Control click  or right click  a tap in Delay Designer s Tap display to open a shortcut menu  containing the following commands       Copy sound parameters  Copies all parameters  except the delay time  of the selected  tap or taps into the Clipboard       Paste sound parameters  Pastes the tap parameters from the Clipboard into the selected  tap or taps  If there are more taps in the Clipboard than are selected i
160. imple compressor  Sustain sets the threshold level  Signals above  this are reduced in level  Level determines the output gain  The  Attack switch can be set to Fast for signals with fast attack transients   such as drums  or to Slow for signals with slow attack phases  such  as strings     Utility Pedals    This section describes the parameters of the Mixer and Splitter pedals     Stompbox Description    Mixer A utility that is used to control the level relationship between Bus A  and Bus B signals  It can be inserted anywhere in the signal chain   but is typically used at the end of the chain  at the extreme right  of the Pedal area   See Using Pedalboard   s Routing Area for details  on use  The A Mix B switch solos the    A    signal  mixes the    A    and     B    signals  or solos the    B    signal  The level setting of the Mix fader  is relevant for all A Mix B switch positions    In stereo instances  the Mixer utility also provides discrete Pan  controls for each bus        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Stompbox Description    Splitter A utility that can be inserted anywhere in the signal chain  Splitter  can be used in two ways   When set to Freq  it works as a frequency dependent signal splitter  that divides the incoming signal  Signals above the frequency set  with the Frequency knob are sent to Bus B  Signals below this  frequency are sent to Bus A   When set to Split  the incoming signal is routed equally to both  buses  The Frequency knob has no impact in this 
161. in a waveform with rich harmonic content     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 147    148    Important  The parameters discussed in this section are available only if the Synthesis In  menu is set to Osc                  FM Int         FM Ratio            FM Ratio field  Sets the ratio between Oscillators 1 and 2  which defines the basic  character of the sound  Even numbered values or their multiples produce harmonic  sounds  whereas odd numbered values or their multiples produce inharmonic  metallic  sounds       An FM Ratio of 1 000 produces results resembling a sawtooth waveform       An FM Ratio of 2 000 produces results resembling a square wave with a pulse width  of 50        An FM Ratio of 3 000 produces results resembling a square wave with a pulse width  of 33      FM Int knob  Determines the intensity of modulation  Higher values result in a more  complex waveform with more overtones     Ata value of 0  the FM tone generator is disabled  and a sawtooth wave is generated     At values above 0  the FM tone generator is activated  Higher values result in a more  complex and brighter sound     Coarse Tune value field  Sets the pitch offset of the oscillator in semitones     e Fine Tune value field  Sets the pitch offset in cents     Tracking Oscillator Pitch Correction Parameters   The tracking oscillator pitch parameters control the automatic pitch correction feature  of the tracking oscillator  They can be used to constrain the pitch of the tracking oscillator  to a scale or 
162. ing Amp Designer Microphone Parameters   Amp Designer offers a choice between three different virtual microphones  As with every  other component in the tone chain  different selections yield very different results  After  choosing a cabinet  you can set the type of microphone you want to be emulated  and  where the microphone is placed in relation to the cabinet  The Mic pop up menu is  available near the right end of the black bar at the bottom  and the speaker adjustment  graphic appears when you move your mouse to the area above the Mic pop up menu     Note  The parameters described in this section are accessible only in the full Amp Designer  interface  If you are in the small interface  click the disclosure triangle to the right of the  Output field at the bottom right edge of the interface to switch back to the full interface     Move your mouse  above the Mic pop up  menu to display the  speaker adjustment  graphic          Cabinet and speaker adjustment graphic  By default  the microphone is placed in the  center of the speaker cone  on axis   This placement produces a fuller  more powerful  sound  suitable for blues or jazz guitar tones  If you place the microphone on the rim  of the speaker  off axis   you obtain a brighter  thinner tone  making it suitable for  cutting rock or R  amp  B guitar parts  Moving the microphone closer to the speaker  emphasizes bass response     The microphone position is shown on the cabinet and indicated by the white dot in  the speak
163. intensity of this distortion with the Tracking parameter       Robotize    Tracking       Chapter 10 Pitch Effects    The Tracking slider and field feature is enhanced by four buttons which immediately set  the slider to the most useful values  as follows     e       sets the slider to    100    All intervals are mirrored       0 sets the slider to 0    Delivers interesting results  with every syllable of the vocal track  being sung at the same pitch  Low values turn sung lines into spoken language       1  sets the slider to 100    The range of the melody is maintained  Higher values augment   and lower values diminish  the melody       2 sets the slider to 200    The intervals are doubled     The Pitch Base parameter is used to transpose the note that the Tracking parameter is  following  As an example  With Tracking set to 0   the pitch of the  spoken  note will be  transposed to the chosen base pitch value     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects    211    Reverb Effects       You can use Reverb effects to simulate the sound of acoustic environments such as rooms   concert halls  caverns  or an open space     Sound waves repeatedly bounce off the surfaces   walls  ceilings  windows  and so on   of  any space  or off objects within a space  gradually dying out until they are inaudible   These bouncing sound waves result in a reflection pattern  more commonly known as a  reverberation  or reverb      The starting portion of a reverberation signal consists of a number of discrete reflec
164. interface is divided into three main sections  the Formant Filter  parameters section in the center of the window  the Modulation parameters section at  the bottom center  and the Output parameters section along the right side       Formant Filter parameters       evoc 20 FB    VQ    Formant Shift       bands lowest slope     Output parameters    6    Resonance    LO sate     A    Intensity     intensity                 Medulation parameters      Formant Filter parameters  Control the frequency bands in the two filter banks  Filter  Bank A  top  blue  and Filter Bank B  bottom  green   See EVOC 20 Filterbank Formant  Filter Parameters       Modulation parameters  Control how Formant Filter parameters are modulated  See  EVOC 20 Filterbank Modulation Parameters       Output parameters  Control the overall output level and panning of the EVOC 20  Filterbank  See EVOC 20 Filterbank Output Parameters     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 137    138    EVOC 20 Filterbank Formant Filter Parameters  The parameters in this section provide precise level and frequency control of the filters     Formant Shift knob i  High and Low Frequency    Lowest button parameters    evVoc 20 FB    Boost A knob    Fade AB slider    IG    Formant Shilt Slope pop up menu    1 Bands lowest    Highest button    Boost B knob       Resonance knob Frequency band faders    Bands value field    e High and Low Frequency parameters  Determine the lowest and highest frequencies  allowed to pass by the filter banks  Frequ
165. is panned hard left     At    90    the center of the stereo base is panned hard right       Higher values move the center of the stereo base back toward the center of the stereo  mix  but this also has the effect of swapping the stereo sides of the recording  For  example  at values of 180   or    180    the center of the stereo base is dead center in the  mix  but the left and right sides of the recording are swapped     The following applies when working with MS signals     At 90    the middle signal is panned hard left     At    90    the middle signal is panned hard right       Higher values move the middle signal back toward the center of the stereo mix  but  this also has the effect of swapping the side signals of the recording  For example  at  values of 180   or    180    the middle signal is dead center in the mix  but the left and  right sides of the side signal are swapped     Getting to Know Stereo Miking Techniques  There are three commonly used stereo miking variants used in recording  AB  XY  and  MS  A stereo recording  put simply  is one that contains two channel signals     AB and XY recordings both record left and right channel signals  but the middle signal is  the result of combining both channels     MS recordings record a real middle signal  but the left and right channels need to be  decoded from the side signal  which is the sum of both left and right channel signals     Understanding AB Miking   In an AB recording  two microphones   commonly omnidir
166. is section describes the filter effects pedals     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    47    Stompbox Description    Auto Funk An auto wah  filter  effect  Sensitivity sets a threshold which  determines how the filter responds to incoming signal levels  Cutoff  sets the center frequency for the filter  The BP LP switch enables  either a bandpass or lowpass filter circuit  Signal frequencies just  above and below the cutoff point are filtered when the BP switch  position is chosen  When the LP switch position is active  only signals  below the cutoff point are allowed through the filter  The Hi Lo  switch chooses one of two preset  filter  resonance settings  The  Up Down switch activates a positive or negative modulation  direction  the    wah    filtering occurs above or below the source  signal frequency         Classic Wah A funky wah effect  straight from 1970 s TV police show soundtracks   You control it by dragging the pedal        Modern Wah A more aggressive wah effect  You control it by dragging the pedal   Mode enables you to choose from the following  Retro Wah  Modern  Wah  Opto Wah 1  Opto Wah 2  Volume  Each has a different tonal  quality  The Q knob determines the resonant characteristics  Low Q  values affect a wider frequency range  resulting in softer resonances   High Q values affect a narrower frequency range  resulting in more  pronounced emphasis        Dynamics Pedals  This section describes the dynamics pedals     Stompbox Description    Squash Compressor A s
167. is typically used as a mastering tool and is  therefore  generally  inserted into master or output channel strips  The way you use the Linear Phase EQ is  obviously dependent on the audio material and what you intend to do with it  but a  useful workflow for many situations is as follows  Set the Linear Phase EQ to a flat response   no frequencies boosted or cut   turn on the Analyzer  and play the audio signal  Keep an  eye on the graphic display to see which parts of the frequency spectrum have frequent  peaks and which parts of the spectrum stay at a low level  Pay particular attention to  sections where the signal distorts or clips  Use the graphic display or parameter controls  to adjust the frequency bands as desired     You can reduce or eliminate unwanted frequencies  and you can raise quieter frequencies  to make them more pronounced  You can adjust the center frequencies of bands 2  through 7 to affect a specific frequency   either one you want to emphasize  such as the  root note of the music  or one you want to eliminate  such as hum or other noise  While  doing so  change the Q parameter s  so that only a narrow range of frequencies are  affected  or widen it to alter a broad area     Each EQ band has a different color in the graphic display  You can graphically adjust the  frequency of a band by dragging horizontally  Drag vertically to adjust the amount of  gain for the band  For bands 1 and 8  the slope values can be changed only in the  parameter area below t
168. itself  using an internal sidechain  This means that the incoming signal  modulates its own phase position     The input signal only passes the delay line and is not affected by any other process  The  Mix parameter blends the effect signal with the original signal        Monitor button  Enable to hear the input signal in isolation  Disable to hear the mixed  signal    Cutoff knob and field  Sets the  center  cutoff frequency of the lowpass filter   Resonance knob and field  Emphasizes frequencies surrounding the cutoff frequency   Display  Shows the impact of parameters on the signal     Mix slider and field  Adjusts the percentage of the effect signal mixed with the original  signal   Max Modulation slider and field  Sets the maximum delay time     Intensity slider and field  Sets the amount of modulation applied to the signal     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects      Phase Reverse checkbox  Extended Parameters area   Enable to reduce the delay time on  the right channel when input signals that exceed the cutoff frequency are received   Available only for stereo instances of the Phase Distortion effect     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects    83       Dynamics Processors 4    The Dynamics processors control the perceived loudness of your audio  add focus and  punch to tracks and projects  and optimize the sound for playback in different situations     The dynamic range of an audio signal is the range between the softest and loudest parts  of the signal   technically  between the low
169. ity guitar amplification systems     Guitar Amp Pro can also be used for experimental sound design and processing  You can  freely use it with other instruments  applying the sonic character of a guitar amp to a  trumpet or vocal part  for example     The amplifier  speaker  and EQ models emulated by Guitar Amp Pro can be combined in  a number of ways to radically or subtly alter the tone  Virtual microphones are used to  pick up the signal of the emulated amplifier and cabinet  You can choose from two  different microphone types  and you can reposition them  Guitar Amp Pro also emulates  classic guitar amplifier effects  including reverb  vibrato  and tremolo     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    29    30    The Guitar Amp Pro window is organized into sections according to different kinds of  parameters     Amp section       CERTI     SPEAKER       Microphone Position section Effects section Microphone Type section      Amp section  The model parameters at the top are used to choose the type of amp   EQ model  and speaker  See Building Your Guitar Amp Pro Model     Farther down in the Amp section  the knobs in the V shaped formation are used to set  tone  gain  and level  See Using Guitar Amp Pro s Gain  Tone  Presence  and Master  Controls       Effects section  Provides parameters to control the built in tremolo  vibrato  and reverb  effects  See Using Guitar Amp Pro s Reverb Effect and Using Guitar Amp Pro s Tremolo  and Vibrato Effects       Microphone Position and Type secti
170. ixed  signal is sent through a further lowpass filter  All three filters have a slope of 6 dB octave     This unique combination of filters allows for gaps in the frequency spectra that can sound  quite good with this sort of nonlinear distortion        Drive slider and field  Sets the amount of gain applied to the input signal  After being  amplified by the Drive value  the signal passes through a highpass filter     Tone slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency  in Hertz  of the highpass filter     Clip Circuit display  Shows the impact of all parameters  with the exception of the High  Shelving filter parameters     Symmetry slider and field  Sets the amount of nonlinear  asymmetrical  distortion applied  to the signal     Clip Filter slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency  in Hertz  of the first lowpass filter     Chapter 3 Distortion Effects 79    80    Mix slider and field  Sets the ratio between the effect  wet  signal and original  dry   signals  following the Clip Filter     Sum LPF knob and field  Sets the cutoff frequency  in Hertz  of the lowpass filter  This  processes the mixed signal      High Shelving  Frequency knob and field  Sets the frequency  in Hertz  of the high  shelving filter  If you set the High Shelving Frequency to around 12 kHz  you can use it  like the treble control on a mixer channel strip or a stereo hi fi amplifier  Unlike these  types of treble controls  however  you can boost or cut the signal by up to  30 dB with  the Gain paramet
171. ker Link button  Located between the Amp and Speaker pop up menus  links  these pop up menus so that when you change the amp model  the speaker associated  with that amp is loaded automatically     Choosing a Guitar Amp Pro Equalizer  The EQ pop up menu and the Amp EQ Link button are near the top of the interface       EQ pop up menu  Contains the following EQ models  British1  British2  American  and  Modern  Each EQ model has unique tonal qualities that affect the way the Bass  Mids   and Treble knobs in the Amp section respond       Amp EQ Link button  Located between the Amp and EQ pop up menus  links these  pop up menus so that when you change the amp model  the EQ model associated  with that amp is loaded automatically     Each amp model has a speaker and EQ model associated with it  The default  combinations of amp  speaker  and EQ settings recreate a well known guitar sound   You are  of course  free to combine any speaker or EQ model with any amp by turning  off the two Link buttons     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Using Guitar Amp Pro s Gain  Tone  Presence  and Master Controls  The Gain  Bass  Mids  Treble  Presence  and Master knobs run from left to right in the  V shaped formation in the upper half of the interface       Gain knob  Sets the amount of pre amplification applied to the input signal  This control  has different effects  depending on which Amp model is chosen  For example  when  you are using the British Clean amp model  the maximum Gain setting produ
172. l Tuning button in the Pitch Correction window  the host  application Tuning settings will be used for the pitch correction process  If this parameter  is turned off  you can use the Ref  Pitch field to freely set the desired reference tuning  to  the root key note      For example  the intonation of a vocal line is often slightly sharp or flat throughout an   entire song  Use the Reference Pitch parameter to address this issue at the input of the  pitch detection process  Set the Reference Pitch to reflect the constant pitch deviation  in cent values  This allows the pitch correction to perform more accurately     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects    Note  Tunings that differ from software instrument tuning can be interesting when you  want to individually correct the notes of singers in a choir  If all voices were individually  and perfectly corrected to the same pitch  the choir effect would be partially lost  You  can prevent this by  de tuning the pitch corrections individually     Automating the Pitch Correction Effect   The Pitch Correction effect can be fully automated  This means that you can automate  the Scale and Root parameters to follow harmonies in the project  Depending on the  accuracy of the original intonation  setting the appropriate key  Scale parameter  may  suffice  Less precise intonations may need more significant changes to the Scale and Root  parameters     Pitch Shifter II    Pitch Shifter Il provides a simple way to combine a pitch shifted version of the s
173. lay the entire impulse response waveform in the main    display  Any envelope length changes are automatically reflected       AandD buttons  Click to limit the    Zoom to Fit    function to the attack and decay portions    of the currently selected envelope shown in the main display  The A and D buttons are  available only when you are viewing the volume and filter envelopes     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    Setting Space Designer s Envelope Parameters   You can edit the volume and filter envelopes of all IRs and the density envelope of  synthesized IRs  All envelopes can be adjusted both graphically in the main display and  numerically in the parameter bar     Whereas some parameters are envelope specific  all envelopes consist of the Attack Time  and Decay Time parameters  The combined total of the Attack Time and Decay Time  parameters is equal to the total length of the synthesized or sampled impulse response   unless the Decay time is reduced  See Setting Impulse Response Lengths in   Space Designer      The large nodes are value indicators of the parameters shown in the parameter bar  below   Init Level  Attack Time  Decay Time  and so on  If you edit any numerical value  in the parameter bar  the corresponding node moves in the main display     To move an envelope node graphically in Space Designer   Drag the node in one of the available directions    Two arrows are shown when you move the cursor over any node in the main display   indicating possibl
174. level     Sustain knob and field  Sets the level of the reverb that remains constant throughout  the sustain phase  It is expressed as a percentage of the full scale volume of the reverb  signal     Hold knob and field  Sets the duration   the time   of the sustain phase     Release knob and field  Sets the time that the reverb takes to fade out completely  after  it has completed the sustain phase     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects    EnVerb Sound Parameters  EnVerb offers the following tone control parameters          Density slider and field  Sets the reverb density       Spread slider and field  Controls the stereo image of the reverb  At 0  the effect  generates a monaural reverb  At 200  the stereo base is artificially expanded       High Cut slider and field  Frequencies above the set value are filtered out of the reverb  tail       Crossover slider and field  Defines the frequency that is used to split the input signal  into two frequency bands  for independent processing       Low Freq Level slider and field  Determines the relative level of  reverb signal  frequencies  below the crossover frequency  In most cases you get better sounding results when  you set negative values for this parameter     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects 217    218    GoldVerb    GoldVerb allows you to edit both the early reflections and diffuse reverb tail separately   making it easy to precisely emulate real rooms     Early Reflections parameters Balance ER Reverb slider Mix slider and field       Rev
175. ll outside these boundaries will  be cut       The length of the blue bar represents the frequency range for both analysis and  synthesis   unless Formant Stretch or Formant Shift are used  as discussed in    Formant  Stretch knob    and    Formant Shift knob    below  You can move the entire frequency  range by dragging the horizontal blue bar at the top  The silver handles on either  end of the blue bar set the Low Frequency and High Frequency values  respectively       You can also use the numeric fields to adjust the frequency values separately     e Lowest button  Click to determine whether the lowest filter band acts as bandpass or  highpass filter  In the Bandpass setting  the frequencies below the lowest bands and  above the highest bands are ignored  In the Highpass setting  all frequencies below  the lowest bands are filtered     e Highest button  Click to determine whether the highest filter band acts as bandpass or  lowpass filter  In the Bandpass setting  the frequencies below the lowest bands and  above the highest bands are ignored  In the Lowpass setting  all frequencies above the  highest bands are filtered       Formant Stretch knob  Alters the width and distribution of all bands in the synthesis  filter bank  This can be a broader or narrower frequency range than that defined by  the blue bar  see    High and Low Frequency parameters    above        Formant Shift knob  Moves all bands in the synthesis filter bank up and down the  frequency spectrum     Chap
176. lse response recording of an  acoustic environment  This is convolved with the incoming audio signal to place it in the  acoustic space provided by the IR     sample rate     2     lt     To activate IR Sample mode  Click the IR Sample button in the circular area to the left of the main display  and then  select the desired impulse response file from any folder     Note  If you have already loaded an impulse response file  clicking the IR Sample button  switches the mode from Synthesized IR to IR Sample mode     To manage the loaded IR file  Click the down arrow next to the IR Sample button to open a pop up menu with the  following commands       Load IR  Loads an impulse response sample without changing the envelopes     Load IR  amp  Init  Loads an impulse response sample and initializes the envelopes       Show in Finder  Opens a Finder window that shows the location of the currently loaded  IR file       Open IR Utility  Opens Impulse Response Utility  where you can record and edit impulse  responses  See the  mpulse Response Utility Manual for details on use     All impulse responses that ship with Logic Pro are installed in the  Library Audio Impulse  Responses Apple folder  Deconvolution files have an  sdir file extension     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    Any mono  stereo  AIFF  SDII  or WAV file can be used as an IR  In addition  surround  formats up to 71  discreet audio files  and B format audio files that comprise a single  surround IR can also be
177. lue bars  When the level exceeds 0 dB  the portion  of the bar above the 0 dB mark turns red     Current peak values are displayed numerically  in dB increments  above the Level Meter   Click in the display to reset peak values     Using the Surround MultiMeter Balance Correlation Parameters   The Surround MultiMeter   s Correlation Meter gauges the balance or sound placement  between all incoming signals  Strongly correlated signals are shown as sharp markers  and less strongly correlated signals as a blurred area  Activate the Surround MultiMeter   s  Balance Correlation button to view the Correlation Meter in the main display     As  WFast    Goniometer       Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Depending on the chosen surround format  a number of points that indicate speaker  positions are shown  L  R  C  Ls  Rs in a 5 1 configuration is displayed in the figure   Lines  connect these points  The center position of each connecting line is indicated by a blue  marker     A gray ball indicates the surround field sound placement  As you move the surround  panner of the channel strip  the ball in the Correlation Meter mirrors your movements   The blue markers also move in real time  with shaded gray lines indicating the divergence  from the centered positions on each of the connecting lines     The LFE channel Correlation Meter is shown at the bottom of the main display  The  horizontal area around the white correlation indicator denotes phase correlation deviations  in real time  This
178. ly left and right channel coherence  but also  the front to rear coherence     Analyzer    Balance   Correlation    Peer Sa    Reset         Goniometer button  Displays the Goniometer results in the main display       Auto Gain field  Sets the amount of display compensation for low input levels  You can  set Auto Gain levels in 10  increments  or set it to off     Note  To avoid confusion with the Auto Gain parameter found in other effects and  processors  such as the compressors   Auto Gain is only used as a display parameter in  the meters  It increases display levels to enhance readability  It does not change the  actual audio levels       Decay field  Determines the time it takes for the Goniometer trace to fade to black       L R  Ls   Rs  Both buttons  Determine which channel pairs are shown in the main display   When you are using the Surround MultiMeter in configurations with exactly two channel  pairs  quad  5 1  and 6 1 configurations   the Goniometer can display both pairs if you  select Both  One pair  for L R  appears in the upper half of the main display  and one   for Ls Rs  appears in the lower half     Chapter 8 Metering Tools 177    178    Using the Surround MultiMeter Level Meter  The Level Meter displays the current signal level on a logarithmic decibel scale  The signal  level for each channel is represented by a blue bar        RMS and Peak levels are shown simultaneously  with RMS levels appearing as dark blue  bars  and Peak levels appearing as light b
179. menu and field  Click to choose different pitch quantization grids from the  Scale pop up menu  See Defining the Pitch Correction Effect s Quantization Grid     Keyboard  Click a key to exclude the corresponding note from pitch quantization grids   This effectively removes this key from the scale  resulting in note corrections that are  forced to the nearest available pitch  key   See Excluding Notes from Pitch Correction     Byp ass  buttons  Click to exclude the corresponding note from pitch correction  In  other words  all notes that match this pitch will not be corrected  This applies to both  user and built in scale quantization grids  See Excluding Notes from Pitch Correction     Bypass All button  Provides a quick way to compare the corrected and original signals   or for automation changes     Show Input and Show Output buttons  Click to display the pitch of the input or output  signal  respectively  on the notes of the keyboard     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects      Correction Amount display  Indicates the amount of pitch change  The red marker  indicates the average correction amount over a longer time period  You can use the  display when discussing  and optimizing  the vocal intonation with a singer during a  recording session       Response slider and field  Determines how quickly the voice reaches the corrected  destination pitch  Singers use portamenti and other gliding techniques  If you choose  a Response value that   s too high  seamless portamenti turn into semi
180. mode     See Using Pedalboard   s Routing Area for details on use        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    49       Delay Effects 2    Delay effects store the input signal   and hold it for a short time    before sending it to  the effect input or output     The held  and delayed  signal is repeated after a given time period  creating a repeating  echo effect  Each subsequent repeat is a little quieter than the previous one  Most delays  also allow you to feed a percentage of the delayed signal back to the input  This can result  in a subtle  chorus like effect or cascading  chaotic audio output     The delay time can often be synchronized to the project tempo by matching the grid  resolution of the project  usually in note values or milliseconds     You can use delays to double individual sounds to resemble a group of instruments  playing the same melody  to create echo effects  to place the sound in a large    space   to generate rhythmic effects  or to enhance the stereo position of tracks in a mix     Delay effects are generally used as channel insert or bussed effects  They are rarely used  onan overall mix  in an output channel   unless you re trying to achieve an unusual effect   This chapter covers the following      Delay Designer  p  51    e Echo  p  72    e Sample Delay  p  72       Stereo Delay  p  73      Tape Delay  p  75     Delay Designer   Delay Designer is a multitap delay  Unlike traditional delay units that offer only one or  two delays  or taps   that may or m
181. mpact  when using the Space Designer as a mono plug in     Spread          Spread    0 56        s Xover    710Hz           Spread knob and field  Extends the stereo or surround base to frequencies that fall below  the frequency determined by the Xover  crossover  parameter       Ata Spread value of 0 00  no stereo or surround information is added  although the  inherent stereo or surround information of the source signal and reverb are retained        At a value of 1 00  the left and right channel divergence is at its maximum       Xover knob and field  Sets the crossover frequency in Hertz  Any synthesized impulse  response frequency that falls below this value will be affected by the Spread parameter   at values over 0      Automating Space Designer   Space Designer cannot be fully automated   unlike most other plug ins  which can be   This is because Space Designer needs to reload the impulse response and recalculate the  convolution before audio can be routed through it     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb 247    You can  however  record  edit  and play back any movement of the following  Space Designer parameters in a suitable host application       Stereo Crossfeed  e Direct Output  e Reverb Output    248 Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb       Specialized Effects and Utilities 13    Logic Pro includes a bundle of specialized effects and utilities designed to address tasks  often encountered during audio production  As examples of where these pro
182. n   the vowel a  for example     If you want to compensate for people   s inability to sustain sung notes for a long period   without taking a breath  you can use the Freeze button  If the synthesis signal needs to  be sustained but the analysis source signal   a vocal part   is not sustained  use the Freeze  button to lock the current formant levels of a sung note  even during gaps in the vocal  part  between words in a vocal phrase  The Freeze parameter can be automated  which  may be useful in this situation     Setting the Number of Bands   The greater the number of bands  the more precisely the sound can be reshaped  As the  number of bands is reduced  the source signal s frequency range is divided up into fewer  bands   and the resulting sound will be formed with less precision by the synthesis  engine  You may find that a good compromise between sonic precision   allowing  incoming signals  speech and vocals  in particular  to remain intelligible   and resource  usage is around 10 to 15 bands     Tip  To ensure the best possible pitch tracking  it is essential to use a mono signal with  no overlapping pitches  Ideally  the signal should be unprocessed and free of background  noises  Using a signal processed with even a slight amount of reverb  for example  will  produce strange and probably undesirable results  Even stranger results will result when  a signal with no audible pitch  such as drum loop  is used  In some situations  however   the resulting artifacts might 
183. n the Tap display   the extra taps in the Clipboard are ignored       Reset sound parameters to default values  Resets all parameters of all selected taps  except  the delay time  to the default values     2x delay time  Doubles the delay time of all selected taps  For example  the delay times  of three taps are set as follows  Tap A   250 ms  Tap B   500 ms  Tap C   750 ms  If you  select these three taps and choose the    2 x delay time    shortcut menu command  the  taps will be changed as follows  Tap A   500 ms  Tap B   1000 ms  Tap C   1500 ms   In other words  a rhythmic delay pattern will unfold half as fast   In musical terms  it  will be played in half time        1 2 x delay time  Halves the delay time of all selected taps  Using the example above   use of the    1 2 x delay time    shortcut menu command changes the taps as follows  Tap A    125 ms  Tap B   250 ms  Tap C   375 ms  In other words  a rhythmic delay pattern  will unfold twice as fast   In musical terms  it will be played in double time        Delete tap s   Deletes all selected taps     Resetting Delay Designer Tap Values  You can use Delay Designer s Tap display and Tap parameter bar to reset tap parameters  to their default values     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    67    68    To reset the value of a tap  Do one of the following     In the Tap display  Option click a tap to reset the chosen parameter to its default setting     If multiple taps are selected  Option clicking any tap will reset the chosen 
184. nal level  after it falls below the threshold level  Set a higher Release value to smooth out dynamic  differences in the signal  Set lower Release values if you want to emphasize dynamic  differences     Important  The discussion above is highly reliant on not only the type of source material   but also the compression ratio and threshold settings     Setting the Compressor Knee  The Knee parameter determines whether the signal is slightly  or severely  compressed  as it approaches the threshold level     Setting a Knee value close to 0  zero  results in no compression of signal levels that fall  just below the threshold  while levels at the threshold are compressed by the full Ratio  amount  This is known as hard knee compression  which can cause abrupt and often  unwanted transitions as the signal reaches the threshold     Increasing the Knee parameter value increases the amount of compression as the signal  approaches the threshold  creating a smoother transition  This is called soft knee  compression     Setting Other Compressor Parameters  As the compressor reduces levels  the overall volume at its output is typically lower than  the input signal  You can adjust the output level with the Gain slider     You can also use the Auto Gain parameter to compensate for the level reduction caused  by compression  choose either    12 dB or 0 dB      When you use the Platinum circuit type  the Compressor can analyze the signal using  one of two methods  Peak or root mean square  R
185. nd effect signals  This can result in  flanger chorus effects  or in metallic sounding modulations   particularly when used with high Feedback values        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    45    Stompbox Description    Roswell Ringer A ring modulation effect that can make incoming audio sound  metallic  or unrecognizable   can deliver tremolos  brighten up  signals and more  The Freq knob sets the core filter cutoff frequency   Fine is a fine tuning knob for the filter frequency  The Lin Exp switch  determines if the frequency curve is linear  12 notes per octave  or  exponential  FB  feedback  determines the amount of the effect  signal that is routed back into the input  This can change the tonal  color  can make the effect more pronounced  or can do both   Balance between the original and effect signals is set with the Mix  knob  See Ringshifter for background information on ring  modulation        Roto Phase A phaser effect that adds movement to  and alters the phase of  the  signal  Rate sets the modulation speed and can run freely  or be  synchronized with the host application tempo by enabling the Sync  button  When synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and note  values  including triplets and dotted notes  with the Rate knob   Intensity sets the strength of the effect  The Vintage Modern switch  activates a fixed frequency internal EQ when switched to Vintage   and deactivates it when switched to Modern        Spin Box Emulation of a Leslie rotor speaker cabinet  commo
186. nd highpass  HP  filters       Feedback slider and field  Determines the amount of the effect signal that is routed back  into the input of the effect     Phaser Sweep Section  Ceiling and Floor sliders and fields  Use the individual slider handles to determine the  frequency range affected by the LFO modulations     Order slider and field  Allows you to choose between different phaser algorithms  The  more orders a phaser has  the heavier the effect     The 4  6  8  10  and 12 settings put five different phaser algorithms at your fingertips   All are modeled on analog circuits  with each designed for a specific application     You are free to select odd numbered settings  5  7  9  11   which  strictly speaking  don   t  generate actual phasing  The more subtle comb filtering effects produced by  odd numbered settings can  however  come in handy on occasion     Env Follow slider and field  Determines the impact of incoming signal levels on the  frequency range  as set with the Ceiling and Floor controls      Chapter9 Modulation Effects    Phaser LFO Section    LFO 1 and LFO 2 Rate knobs and fields  Set the speed for each LFO       LFO Mix slider and fields  Determines the ratio between the two LFOs       Env Follow slider and field  Determines the impact of incoming signal levels on the speed  of LFO 1       Phase knob and field  Available only in stereo and surround instances  Controls the  phase relationship between the individual channel modulations     At 0    the extreme
187. nd lines below the center  position denote pans to the right  Left  blue  and right  green  channels are easily  identified        In stereo input stereo output configurations  the Pan parameter adjusts the stereo balance   not the position of the tap in the stereo field  The Pan parameter appears as a dot on the  tap  which represents stereo balance  Drag the dot up or down the tap to adjust the  stereo balance     By default  stereo spread is set to 100   To adjust this  drag either side of the dot  As you  do so  the width of the line extending outwards from the dot changes  Keep an eye on  the Spread parameter in the Tap parameter bar while you are adjusting        In surround configurations  the bright line represents the surround angle  For more  information  see Working with Delay Designer in Surround     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    65    66    Editing Taps in Delay Designer   s Tap Parameter Bar   The Tap parameter bar provides instant access to all parameters of the chosen tap  The  Tap parameter bar also provides access to several parameters that are not available in  the Tap display  such as Transpose and Flip     Editing in the Tap parameter bar is fast and precise when you want to edit the parameters  of a single tap  All parameters of the selected tap are available  with no need to switch  display views or estimate values with vertical lines  If you choose multiple taps in the Tap  display  the values of all selected taps are changed relative to each other     Op
188. ng sound when used in combination with a slow  oscillator sweep  Comb filtering effects are created by using high Feedback settings  with a short delay time  less than 10 ms   Use of longer delay times  in conjunction with  high Feedback settings  creates continuously rising and falling frequency shift effects     Stereo Width knob and field  Determines the breadth of the effect signal in the stereo  field  Stereo Width affects only the effect signal of the Ringshifter  not the dry input  signal     Env Follower slider and field  Determines the amount of Dry Wet parameter modulation  by the input signal level     LFO slider and field  Sets the LFO modulation depth of the Dry Wet parameter     Rotor Cabinet Effect   The Rotor Cabinet effect emulates the rotating loudspeaker cabinet of a Hammond organ   s  Leslie effect  It simulates both the rotating speaker cabinet  with and without deflectors   and the microphones that pick up the sound        Basic Rotor Speaker Parameters  The Rotor Cabinet offers the following basic rotor speaker parameters          Rotor Speed buttons  These switch the rotor speed in the following ways     Chorale  Slow movement     Tremolo  Fast movement     e Brake  Stops the rotor     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 197    198      Cabinet Type pop up menu  You can choose from the following cabinet models     Wood  Mimics a Leslie with a wooden enclosure  and sounds like the Leslie 122 or  147 models     Proline  Mimics a Leslie with a more open enclosure
189. nly used with  the Hammond B3 organ  Cabinet sets the type of speaker box  Fast  Rate sets the maximum modulation speed  only applies when Fast  button is active   Response determines the amount of time required  for the rotor to reach its maximum and minimum speed  Drive  increases the input gain  introducing distortion to the signal  The  Bright switch activates a high shelving filter when turned on  The  Slow  Brake and Fast buttons determine how the    speaker     behaves  Slow rotates the speaker slowly  Fast rotates the speaker  quickly  up to the maximum speed determined by the Fast Rate  knob   Brake stops the speaker rotation  See Rotor Cabinet Effect  for background information on the Leslie effect        Total Tremolo A flexible tremolo effect  modulation of the signal level   Rate sets  the modulation speed and can run freely  or be synchronized with  the host application tempo by enabling the Sync button  When  synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and note values  including  triplets and dotted notes   Depth sets the strength of the effect   Wave and Smooth work in combination to alter the waveform shape  of the LFO  This enables you to create floating changes in level  or  abrupt steps  Volume determines the output level of the effect  The  1 2 and 2x Speed buttons immediately halve or double the current  Rate value  Hold down the Speed Up and Slow Down buttons to  gradually accelerate or reduce the current Rate value to the  maximum or minimum possible value
190. nsion for the selected band     e Peak RMS fields  Enter a smaller value for shorter peak detection  or a larger value for  RMS detection  in milliseconds     Attack fields  Set the amount of time before compression starts for the selected band   after the signal exceeds the threshold       Release fields  Set the time required before compression stops on the selected band   after the signal falls below the threshold     Band on off buttons  1  2  3  and 4   Enable disable each band  1 to 4   When enabled   the button is highlighted  and the corresponding band appears in the graphic display  area above       Byp ass  buttons  Enable to bypass the selected frequency band     Solo buttons  Enable to hear compression on only the selected frequency band       Level meters  The bar on the left shows the input level  and the bar on the right shows  the output level     Threshold arrows  Two arrows appear to the left of each Level meter     The upper arrow adjusts the Compression Threshold  Compr Thrsh      The lower arrow adjusts the Expansion Threshold  Expnd Thrsh      Multipressor Output Section  Auto Gain pop up menu  When you choose On  it references the overall processing of  the signal to 0 dB  making the output louder       Lookahead value field  Adjusts how far the effect looks forward in the incoming audio  signal  in order to react earlier to peak volumes  and therefore achieve smoother  transitions     Out slider  Sets the overall gain at the Multipressor output       L
191. nvelopes and the EQ to default values     e Volume Env button  Displays the volume envelope in the foreground of the main display   The other envelope curves are shown as transparencies in the background  See Working  with Space Designer s Volume Envelope       Filter Env button  Displays the filter envelope in the foreground of the main display   The other envelope curves are shown as transparencies in the background  See Working  with Space Designer s Filter       Density Env button  Displays the density envelope in the foreground of the main display   The other envelope curves are shown as transparencies in the background  See Working  in Space Designer s Synthesized IR Mode       EQbutton  Displays the four band parametric EQ in the main display  See Working with  Space Designer s EQ       Reverse button  Reverses the impulse response and envelopes  When the impulse  response is reversed  you are effectively using the tail rather than the front end of the  sample  You may need to change the Pre Dly and other parameter values when  reversing     Zooming and Navigating Space Designer   s Envelope View  When displaying envelopes  the main display offers the following zoom and navigation    parameters  not shown in EQ view      Overview display       Zoom to fit  A       Overview display  Indicates which portion of the impulse response file is currently visible    in the main display  helping you to orientate yourself when zooming          Zoom to Fit    button  Click to disp
192. o add a pedal to the Pedal area  Do one of the following     Drag the stompbox that you want to insert from the Pedal Browser to the appropriate  Pedal area position  This can be to the left  to the right  or in between existing pedals   Ensure that no pedal is selected in the Pedal area  then double click a stompbox in the  Pedal Browser to add it to the right of all existing effects in the Pedal area    Note  You insert Mixer and Splitter utility pedals in a different way  See Using Pedalboard   s    To change an effect pedal position in the Pedal area   Drag the stompbox to a new position  either to the right or the left  Automation and bus  routings  if active  are moved with the effect pedal  For information about automation  and bus routings  see Using Pedalboard   s Routing Area    Note  There are two exceptions to the bus routing rule  If the dragged pedal is the only  pedal between a Splitter and Mixer utility  both utility pedals are automatically removed   If the second Bus     B     is not active at the destination  the pedal is inserted into Bus A     To change a Mixer utility position in the Pedal area  Drag the Mixer utility to a new position  either to the left or the right     When moved to the left  The    downmix    of Bus A and B will occur at the earlier insertion  point  Relevant effect pedals are moved to the right and are inserted into Bus A     When moved to the right  The    downmix    of Bus A and B will occur at the later insertion  point  Relevant
193. odels are inspired by the powerful  ultra high gain amplifier heads that  put the    chunk    into modern hard rock and metal music  All are paired with 4 x 12   cabinets  Their signature tones range from heavy distortion to extremely heavy distortion   If you want powerful lows  razor edged highs  and serious sustain  these are the models  you should look to first     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Model Description    Modern American Stack A powerful  ultra high gain amp that is ideal for heavy rock and  metal  Use the Mids knob to set an ideal amount of scoop or boost        High Octane Stack Although a powerful  high gain amp  this model offers a smooth  transition between gain settings and excellent natural compression   It is a great choice for fast soloing and for two  and three note  chords        Turbo Stack An aggressive sounding amp with spiky highs and noisy harmonics   especially at high gain settings  Try the Turbo Stack when you need  to slice through a mix        Tip  Combining the Turbo Stack with distortion and fuzz pedals may actually diminish  the amp   s edge  A dry sound is often the best choice for high impact riffs     Additional Combos  The combos and utility models in this category are versatile amps that can be used for a  wide variety of musical styles     Model Description    Studio Combo A 1x 12  combo based on boutique combos of the 1980s and 1990s  that use multiple gain stages to generate smooth  sustain heavy  distortion without sacrificing bol
194. of the delay line with the  original signal  Mixing a vibrato signal with an original  statically pitched signal results  in a chorus effect  This organ style chorus sounds different from the Chorus plug in       If the CO setting is chosen  neither the chorus nor vibrato is enabled     Chorus Int knob  Sets the intensity of a chosen chorus effect type  If a vibrato effect  type is chosen  this parameter has no effect     Stereo Phase knob  When set to a value between 0   and 360    Stereo Phase determines  the phase relationship between left and right channel modulations  thus enabling  synchronized stereo effects     If you set the knob to    free     you can set the modulation speed of the left and right  channel independently     Rate Left knob  Sets the modulation speed of the left channel when Stereo Phase is set  to    free     If Stereo Phase is set to a value between 0   and 360    Rate Left sets the  modulation speed for both the left and right channels  Rate Right has no function when  in this mode     Rate Right knob  Sets the modulation speed of the right channel when Stereo Phase is  set to    free        Chapter9 Modulation Effects    Spreader   Spreader widens the stereo spectrum of a signal  The Spreader effect periodically shifts  the frequency range of the original signal  thus changing the perceived width of the  signal  The delay between channels can also be specified  in samples   adding to the  perceived width and channel separation of a stereo input si
195. ol the integrated guitar effects  See Getting to Know Amp Designer s Effects  Parameters       Microphone parameters  Located slightly above the right end of the black bar at the  bottom  these parameters are used to set the type and position of the microphone  that captures the amplifier and cabinet sound  See Setting Amp Designer Microphone  Parameters     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    To switch between full and smaller versions of the interface   Click the disclosure triangle between the Cabinet and Mic pop up menus in the full  interface to switch to the smaller version  To switch back to the full interface  click the  disclosure triangle beside the Output field in the small interface  You can access all the  parameters  with the exception of microphone selection and positioning  in the small  interface        Click here in Click here in  full interface  small interface     Choosing an Amp Designer Model   You can choose a preconfigured model   consisting of an amplifier  a cabinet  an EQ type   and a microphone type   from the Model pop up menu at the left end of the black bar  at the bottom of the Amp Designer interface  Your choices include several combinations  in each of the following categories          Tweed Combos    e Classic American Combos    e British Stacks      British Combos  e British Alternatives    e Metal Stacks         Additional Combos    Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    13    Tweed Combos   The Tweed models are based on American combos from the 1950s and 
196. on phases of the channels     e Distribution pop up menu  Available only in surround instances  Defines how phase  offsets between individual channels are distributed in the surround field  You can  choose from    circular        lefteoright        frontcrear        random     and    new random     distributions  to randomize the phase  choose    new random           Offset slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the amount that the modulation   cycle  is shifted to the left or right  resulting in subtle or significant tremolo variations     Chapter9 Modulation Effects       Pitch Effects 10    You can use the Pitch effects included in Logic Pro to transpose or correct the pitch of  audio signals  These effects can also be used for creating unison or slightly thickened  parts  or even for creating harmony voices     This chapter covers the following   e Pitch Correction Effect  p  203   e Pitch Shifter II  p  207    e Vocal Transformer  p  208     Pitch Correction Effect   You can use the Pitch Correction effect to correct the pitch of incoming audio signals   Improper intonation is a common problem with vocal tracks  for example  The sonic  artifacts that can be introduced by the process are minimal and can barely be heard  as  long as your corrections are moderate     Pitch correction works by accelerating and slowing down the audio playback speed   ensuring that the input signal  sung vocal  always matches the correct note pitch  If you  try to correct larger int
197. ons  These sections enable you to set the position  and type of the microphone  See Setting Guitar Amp Pro Microphone Parameters     Building Your Guitar Amp Pro Model   An amplifier    model    consists of an amplifier  speaker cabinet  EQ type  and microphone  type  You can create your own hybrids of different amplifiers  cabinets  and so on   using  the pop up menus at the top center of the interface  You choose the microphone position  and type in the yellow areas to the left and right     You can use the Settings menu to save your new hybrid amp combos as setting files   which also include any parameter changes you may have made     How to build your amplifier model is described in the following sections     Choosing a Guitar Amp Pro Amplifier  e Choosing a Guitar Amp Pro Speaker Cabinet    Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Choosing a Guitar Amp       Pro Equalizer    e Setting Guitar Amp Pro Microphone Parameters    Choosing a Guitar Amp Pro Amplifier  You can choose an amplifier model from the Amp pop up menu near the top of the  interface     UK Combo 30W  Neutral sounding amp  well suited for clean or crunchy rhythm parts     e UKTop 50W  Quite aggressive in the high frequency range  well suited for classical rock  sounds     US Combo 40W  Clean sounding amp model  well suited for funk and jazz sounds       US Hot Combo 40W  Emphasizes the high mid frequency range  making this model  ideal for solo sounds     US Hot Top 100W  This amp produces very fat sounds  even at l
198. ools found in the Utility category can help with routine tasks and situations that you  may encounter during production  such as the following  Gain plug ins are used to adjust  the level or phase of input signals  I O Utility enables you to integrate external audio  effects into your host application mixer  Test Oscillator generates a static frequency or  sine sweep    This chapter covers the following      Down Mixer  p  259      Gain Plug in  p  260      1 0 Utility  p  261    e Multichannel Gain  p  263    e Test Oscillator  p  263     Down Mixer  You can use the Down Mixer to adjust the input format of the surround master channel  strip  This allows you to quickly check a surround mix in stereo  for example       gt  lt   4  pP View  gt  Show CS v   Show Insert  gt     Bypass    Down Mixer    To Stereo  0 0dB  0 0dB  0 0dB  0 0dB  0 0dB       Important  The desired surround format is chosen from the Insert menu when you insert  the plug in  Choices include  To Stereo  To Quad  To LCRS     259       260    Channel mapping  panning  and downmixing are automatically handled behind the  scenes  You do  however  have some control over the mix  Use the Level sliders to control  the respective channel levels  The number  and names  of sliders is dependent on the  chosen plug in format     Gain Plug in   Gain amplifies  or reduces  the signal by a specific decibel amount  It is very useful for  quick level adjustments when you are working with automated tracks during  post proce
199. open chords   one reason  why they were embraced by the    Brit pop    bands of the 1990s  The Stadium amps are  famed for their ability to play ultra loud without dissolving into mushy distortion  They  retain crisp treble and superb note definition  even at maximum gain settings     Model Description    Sunshine Stack A robust sounding head paired with a 4 x 12  cabinet  It s a great  choice for powerful pop rock chords        Small Sunshine Combo A 1x 12  combo based on a modern amp known for a    big amp     sound  It is brighter than the Sunshine Stack head  with a touch of  1960s British Combo flavor        Stadium Stack A classic head and 4x 12  cabinet configuration popular with 1970s  arena rock bands  Its tones are cleaner than other Amp Designer  4x 12  stacks  while still retaining body and impact  A good choice  if you need power and clarity        Stadium Combo A 2x 12  combo based on a modern amp  The tone is a little  smoother and rounder than that of the Stadium Stack        Tip  The tone of the Sunshine Stack can seem dark at times  but a high Treble knob setting  opens up the sound  While the Small Sunshine Combo sounds great with its default   1x 12  cabinet  it also shines through a 4 x 12  cabinet  The Stadium amps can be slow  to distort  so most famous users have paired them with aggressive fuzz pedals  Try  combining it with Pedalboard   s Candy Fuzz or Fuzz Machine stompboxes  See Distortion  Pedals and Pedalboard     Metal Stacks   The Metal Stack m
200. or arbitrarily placed  or moved  sources       Speaker CTC   Cross Talk Cancellation  Setting for speaker playback  allowing you to  play back binaurally panned signals through stereo loudspeakers  Good spatial  reproduction is restricted to a limited range of listening positions  on the symmetrical  plane  between the speakers     e CTC    Speaker Angle field and slider  This parameter is effective only when the Speaker  CTC compensation mode is chosen  To achieve the best binaural effect  enter the angle  that your stereo speakers are turned towards the center   the listening position     For full details on using the Binaural Panner with the Binaural Post Processing plug in   see the Logic Pro User Manual     Direction Mixer  You can use the Direction Mixer to decode middle and side audio recordings or to spread  the stereo base of a left right recording and determine its pan position     Chapter 7 Imaging Processors    The Direction Mixer works with any type of stereo recording  regardless of the miking  technique used  For information about XY  AB  and MS recordings  see Getting to Know  Stereo Miking Techniques        e Input buttons  Click the LR button if the input signal is a standard left right signal  and  click the MS button if the signal is middle and side encoded       Spread slider and field  Determines the spread of the stereo base in LR input signals   Determines the level of the side signal in MS input signals  See Using the Direction  Mixer   s Spread Param
201. or bell  filter  Frequencies close to  the cutoff frequency are emphasized     CryB  This setting mimics the sound of the popular Cry Baby wah wah pedal     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    e Morl1  This setting mimics the sound of a popular wah wah pedal  It features a slight  peak characteristic     e Morl2  This setting mimics the sound of a popular distortion wah wah pedal  It has  a constant Q uality  Factor setting     Auto Gain button  The wah wah effect can cause wide variations in the output level   Turning Auto Gain on compensates for this behavior  and limits the output signal  dynamics  see Setting the Wah Wah Level with Auto Gain      Wah Level knob  Sets the amount of the wah filtered signal     Relative Q slider  Adjusts the main filter peak  relative to the model setting  thereby  obtaining a sharper or softer wah wah sweep  When set to a value of 0  the original  peak level setting of the model is active     Pedal Range slider  Sets the sweep range of the Wah Wah filter   when controlled with  a MIDI foot pedal  This parameter is designed to compensate for the differences in  mechanical range between a MIDI foot pedal and a classic Wah Wah pedal  see Setting  the Pedal Range      Auto Wah Parameters   In addition to using MIDI foot pedals  you can control the Wah Wah effect with the Auto  Wah feature  which continually performs a filter sweep across the entire range  See Using  the Fuzz Wah          Depth knob  Sets the depth of the Auto Wah effect  When set to ze
202. osting the attack phase can add snap to a drum sound  or it can amplify the initial  pluck or pick sound of a stringed instrument  Attenuating the attack causes percussive  signals to fade in more softly  You can also mute the attack  making it virtually inaudible   A creative use for this effect is alteration of the attack transients to mask poor timing of  recorded instrument parts     Boosting the release phase also accentuates any reverb applied to the affected channel  strip  Conversely  attenuating the release phase makes tracks originally drenched in reverb  sound drier  This is particularly useful when working with drum loops  but it has many  other applications as well  Let your imagination be your guide     When using the Enveloper  set the Threshold to the minimum value and leave it there   Only when you seriously raise the release phase  which boosts the noise level of the  original recording  should you raise the Threshold slider a little  This limits the Enveloper  to affecting only the useful part of the signal     Drastic boosting or cutting of either the release or attack phase may change the overall  level of the signal  You can compensate for this by adjusting the Out Level slider     Generally  you ll find that Attack Time values of around 20 ms and Release Time values  of 1500 ms are good to start with  Then adjust them for the type of signal that you re  processing     The Lookahead slider defines how far into the future of the incoming signal the Envelo
203. ound  the center frequency that are affected     Note  The Q parameter of Band 1 and Band 8 has no effect when the slope is set to  6 dB Oct  When the Q parameter is set to an extremely high value  such as 100   these  filters affect only a very narrow frequency band  and can be used as notch filters     Link button  Activates Gain Q coupling  which automatically adjusts the Q  bandwidth   when you raise or lower the gain on any EQ band  to preserve the perceived bandwidth  of the bell curve       Analyzer Mode buttons  Extended Parameters area   Choose Peak or RMS     Analyzer Decay slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Adjust the decay rate  in dB  per second  of the Analyzer curve  peak decay in Peak mode or an averaged decay in  RMS mode        Gain Q Couple Strength pop up menu  Extended Parameters area   Choose the amount    of Gain Q coupling     Set Gain Q Couple to strong to preserve most of the perceived bandwidth     Light and medium settings allow some change as you raise or lower the gain       The asymmetric settings feature a stronger coupling for negative gain values than  for positive values  so the perceived bandwidth is more closely preserved when you  cut  rather than boost  gain     Note  If you play back automation of the Q parameter with a different Gain Q Couple  setting  the actual Q values will be different than they were when the automation was  recorded     Chapter5 Equalizers    119    120    Using the Linear Phase EQ   The Linear Phase EQ 
204. ow Master settings  that  result in broad sounds with a lot of    oomph          Custom 50W  With the Presence parameter set to 0  this amp model is well suited for  smooth fusion lead sounds     British Clean  GarageBand   Simulates the classic British Class A combos used  continuously since the 1960s for rock music  without any significant modification  This  model is ideally suited for clean or crunchy rhythm parts       British Gain  GarageBand   Emulates the sound of a British tube head and is synonymous  with rocking  powerful rhythm parts and lead guitars with a rich sustain     American Clean  GarageBand   Emulates the traditional full tube combos used for clean  and crunchy sounds       American Gain  GarageBand   Emulates a modern Hi Gain head  making it suitable for  distorted rhythm and lead parts     Clean Tube Amp  Emulates a tube amp model with very low gain  distortion only when  using very high input levels or Gain Master settings      Choosing a Guitar Amp Pro Speaker Cabinet  The speaker cabinet can have a huge bearing on the type of tones you can extract from  your chosen amplifier  The speaker parameters are found near the top of the interface       Speaker pop up menu  You can choose one of the 15 speaker models       UK 1x 12 open back  Classic open enclosure with one 12  speaker  neutral   well balanced  multifunctional       UK2x 12 open back  Classic open enclosure with two 12  speakers  neutral   well balanced  multifunctional       UK2x 12 closed  
205. parameter to  its default value for all selected taps     In the Tap parameter bar  Option click a parameter value to reset it to the default setting     If multiple taps are selected  Option clicking a parameter of any tap resets all selected  taps to the default value for that parameter     Synchronizing Taps in Delay Designer   Delay Designer can either synchronize to the project tempo or run independently  When  you are in synchronized mode  Sync mode   taps snap to a grid of musically relevant  positions  based on note durations  You can also set a Swing value in Sync mode  which  varies the precise timing of the grid  resulting in a more laid back  less robotic feel for  each tap  When you are not in Sync mode  taps don t snap to a grid  nor can you apply  the Swing value     When Sync mode is on  a grid that matches the chosen Grid parameter value is shown  in the Identification bar  All taps are moved towards the closest delay time value on the  grid  Subsequently created or moved taps are snapped to positions on the grid     When you save a Delay Designer setting  the Sync mode status  Grid  and Swing values  are all saved  When you save a setting with Sync mode on  the grid position of each tap  is also stored  This ensures that a setting loaded into a project with a different tempo to  that of the project the setting was created in will retain the relative positions  and rhythm   of all taps   at the new tempo     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Note  Delay Designer off
206. parameters are Threshold and Ratio  The Threshold sets  the floor level in decibels  Signals that exceed this level are reduced by the amount set  as the Ratio     The Ratio is a percentage of the overall level  the more the signal exceeds the threshold   the more it is reduced  A ratio of 4 1 means that increasing the input by 4 dB results in  an increase of the output by 1 dB  if above the threshold     As an example  with the Threshold set at    20 dB and the Ratio set to 4 1  a    16 dB peak  in the signal  4 dB louder than the threshold  is reduced by 3 dB  resulting in an output  level of    19 dB     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Setting Suitable Compressor Envelope Times   The Attack and Release parameters shape the dynamic response of the Compressor  The  Attack parameter determines the time it takes after the signal exceeds the threshold level  before the Compressor starts reducing the signal     Many sounds  including voices and musical instruments  rely on the initial attack phase  to define the core timbre and characteristic of the sound  When compressing these types  of sounds  you should set higher Attack values to ensure that the attack transients of the  source signal aren t lost or altered     When attempting to maximize the level of an overall mix  it is best to set the Attack  parameter to a lower value  because higher values often result in no  or minimal   compression     The Release parameter determines how quickly the signal is restored to its origi
207. pen back 1960s cabinet with glistening highs and surprising  low mid body    Brownface 1 x 12 A beautifully balanced 1960s open back cabinet  It is smooth and    rich sounding  but with nice transparency        Brownface 1 x 15 This early 1960s open back cabinet houses the largest speaker  emulated by Amp Designer  Its highs are clear and glassy  and its  lows are tight and focused        Vintage British 4 x 12 This late 1960s closed back cabinet is synonymous with classic rock   The tone is big and thick  yet also bright and lively  thanks to the  complex phase cancellations between the four 30 watt speakers              Modern British 4 x 12 A closed back 4 x 12  cabinet that is brighter  and has a better  low end than the Vintage British 4 x 12  with less mid range  emphasis    Brown 4 x 12 A closed back 4 x 12  cabinet with a great bottom end and complex  mid range    British Blues 2 x 12 A bright sounding open back cabinet with solid lows  and highs    that maintain their edge even at high gain settings        Modern American 4 x 12 A closed back 4 x 12  cabinet that has a full sound  The low mids  are denser than the British 4 x 12  cabinets           Studio 1 x 12 A compact sounding open back cabinet with full mids and  shimmering highs    British 2 x 12 A mid 1960s open back cabinet with an open  smooth tone    British 1 x 12 A small open back cabinet with crisp highs and nice low mid  transparency    Boutique British 2 x 12 A 2x 12  cabinet based on the British 2 x 1
208. per  looks  in order to anticipate future events  You generally won t need to use this feature   except when processing signals with extremely sensitive transients  If you do raise the  Lookahead value  you may need to adjust the Attack Time to compensate     In contrast to a compressor or expander  the Enveloper operates independently of the  absolute level of the input signal   but this works only if the Threshold slider is set to the  lowest possible value     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    97    98    Expander   The Expander is similar in concept to a compressor  but increases  rather than reduces   the dynamic range above the threshold level  You can use the Expander to add liveliness  and freshness to your audio signals          Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level  Signals above this level are expanded    e Peak RMS buttons  Determine whether the Peak or RMS method is used to analyze the  signal    e Attack knob and field  Determines the time it takes for the Expander to respond to  signals that exceed the threshold level      Expansion display  Shows the expansion curve applied to the signal       Release knob and field  Sets the time it takes for the Expander to stop processing the  signal after it falls below the threshold level       Ratio slider and field  Sets the expansion ratio   the ratio of signal expansion when the  threshold is exceeded     Note  As the Expander is a genuine upward expander   in contrast to a downward  expander  which incr
209. point in the impulse response sample  See Using  Space Designer   s IR Start Parameter     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb      Spread and Xover knobs  synthesized IRs only   Spread adjusts the perceived width of  the stereo or surround field  Xover sets the crossover frequency in Hertz  Any synthesized  impulse response frequency that falls below this value will be affected by the Spread  parameter  See Using Space Designer s Spread Parameters     Using Space Designer   s Input Slider  The Input slider behaves differently in stereo or surround instances  The Input slider does  not appear in mono or mono to stereo instances       In stereo instances  the Input slider determines how a stereo signal is processed   e In surround instances  the Input slider determines how much LFE signal is mixed with  the surround channels routed into the reverb     Stereo Surround    sien ii    Space Designer Input Slider  Stereo Mode    Stereo setting  top of slider   The signal is processed on both channels  retaining the  stereo balance of the original signal       Mono setting  middle of slider   The signal is processed in mono       XStereo setting  bottom of slider   The signal is inverted  with processing for the right  channel occurring on the left  and vice versa       In between positions  A mixture of stereo to mono crossfeed signals is produced   Space Designer Input Slider  Surround Mode      Surround Max setting  top of slider   The maximum amount of LFE signal is mix
210. processed signal     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    b Use the High Level slider to blend frequencies above the defined frequency band with  the processed signal     You can modulate the defined frequency band using the Speed  CF Modulation  and BW  Modulation parameters     a Speed determines the modulation frequency     b CF  Center Frequency  Modulation defines the intensity of the center frequency  modulation     c BW  Band Width  Modulation controls the amount of bandwidth modulation     After making your adjustments  you can use the Gain slider to adjust the final output  level of the processed signal     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    159       Imaging Processors Fi    The Imaging processors included in Logic Pro are tools for manipulating the stereo image   This enables you to make certain sounds  or the overall mix  seem wider and more spacious   You can also alter the phase of individual sounds within a mix  to enhance or suppress  particular transients     This chapter covers the following     Binaural Post Processing  p  161   e Direction Mixer  p  162      Stereo Spread  p  165     Binaural Post Processing   Each channel strip in Logic Pro allows you to use a special version of the Pan knob  known  as the Binaural Panner  This is a psychoacoustic processor that can simulate arbitrary  sound source positions   including up and down information   when fed a standard  stereo signal     The output signal that results from Binaural Panner use is best suited for headphone  pl
211. put signals  Choose moderate  monitoring levels  and only use loudspeakers that are actually capable of reproducing  the very low frequencies produced  Never try to force a loudspeaker to output these  frequency bands with an EQ           SubBass Parameters  The SubBass offers the following parameters        e High Ratio knob and field  Adjusts the ratio between the generated signal and the  original upper band signal     e High Center knob and field  Sets the center frequency of the upper band     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities    High Bandwidth knob and field  Sets the width of the upper band       Graphic display  Shows the selected upper and lower frequency bands     Freq  Mix slider and field  Adjusts the mix ratio between the upper and lower frequency  bands       Low Ratio knob and field  Adjusts the ratio between the generated signal and the original  lower band signal     Low Center knob and field  Sets the center frequency of the lower band       Low Bandwidth knob and field  Sets the width of the lower band     Dry slider and field  Sets the amount of dry  non effect  original  signal     Wet slider and field  Sets the amount of wet  effect  signal     Using SubBass   Unlike a pitch shifter  the waveform of the signal generated by SubBass is not based on  the waveform of the input signal  but is sinusoidal   that is  it uses a sine wave  Given  that pure sine waves rarely sit well in complex arrangements  you can control the amount  of   and balance b
212. r     LFO parameters  The oscillator frequency and output signal can be modulated with an  LFO  See Modulating the Ringshifter with the LFO     Output parameters  The output section of the Ringshifter includes a feedback loop and  controls to set the stereo width and amount of the dry and wet signals  See Controlling  the Ringshifter Output Parameters     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    Setting the Ringshifter Mode  The four mode buttons determine whether the Ringshifter operates as a frequency shifter  or as a ring modulator        Freq Shift Ring Mod       M    Single  Frequency Shifter  button  The frequency shifter generates a single  shifted effect  signal  The oscillator Frequency control determines whether the signal is shifted up   positive value  or down  negative value      Dual  Frequency Shifter  button  The frequency shifting process produces one shifted  effect signal for each stereo channel   one is shifted up  the other is shifted down  The  oscillator Frequency control determines the shift direction in the left versus the right  channel     OSC  Ring Modulator  button  The ring modulator uses the internal sine wave oscillator  to modulate the input signal     Side Chain  Ring Modulator  button  The ring modulator modulates the amplitude of  the input signal with the audio signal assigned via the side chain input  The sine wave  oscillator is switched off  and the Frequency controls are not accessible when Side  Chain mode is active     Using the Ringshifter   
213. r and field  Determines the amount of the effect signal that is routed back  to the input  If you re going for radical flanging effects  enter a high Feedback value  If  simple doubling is what you re after  don t use any feedback  Negative values invert  the phase of the feedback signal  resulting in more chaotic effects     Flanger Chorus knob and field  Sets the basic delay time  Set to the far left position to  create flanger effects  to the center for chorus effects  and to the far right to hear clearly  discernible delays     De Warble button  Ensures that the pitch of the modulated signal remains constant     Const Mod   Constant Modulation  button  Ensures that the modulation width remains  constant  regardless of the modulation rate     Note  When Const Mod is enabled  higher modulation frequencies reduce the  modulation width     Mod  Intensity slider and field  Sets the modulation amount     LFO Mix slider and fields  Determines the balance between the two LFOs     LFO 1 and LFO 2 Rate knobs and fields  The left knob sets the modulation rate for the  left stereo channel  and the right knob sets the modulation rate for the right stereo  channel     In surround instances  the center channel is assigned the middle value of the left and  right LFO Rate knobs  The other channels are assigned values between the left and  right LFO rates     Note  The right LFO Rate knob is available only in stereo and surround instances  and  it can be set separately only if the Left Rig
214. r banks  You can use rhythmic material   such as a drum loop   as   an input signal  and set up tempo synchronized modulations  with different rates for   each LFO  Feel free to try a tempo synchronized delay effect   such as Tape Delay   after  the EVOC 20 Filterbank to produce unique polyrhythms     EVOC 20 Filterbank Output Parameters  The Output parameters provide control over the level and stereo width  The Output  section also incorporates an integrated overdrive  distortion  circuit     Stereo Mode          Stereo Width         Overdrive button  Click to turn the overdrive circuit on or off     Note  To hear the overdrive effect  you may need to boost the level of one or both  filter banks       Level slider  Controls the volume of the EVOC 20 Filterbank output signal       Stereo Mode pop up menu  Sets the input output mode of the EVOC 20 Filterbank  The  choices are m s  mono input stereo output  and s s  stereo input stereo output        In s s mode  the left and right channels are processed by separate filter banks       In m s mode  a stereo input signal is first summed to mono before being routed to  the filter banks     Chapter 6 Filter Effects      Stereo Width knob  Distributes the output signals of the filter bands in the stereo field     At the left position  the outputs of all bands are centered     At the centered position  the outputs of all bands ascend from left to right       At the right position  the bands are output   alternately   to the left and r
215. r ears RMS  instruments  not peak reading instruments  Therefore  using RMS meters makes sense  most of the time  Alternatively  you can use both RMS and Peak meters     MultiMeter    The MultiMeter provides a collection of professional gauge and analysis tools in a single  window  It includes       An Analyzer to view the level of each 1 3 octave frequency band    A Goniometer for judging phase coherency in a stereo sound field    A Correlation Meter to spot mono phase compatibility      An integrated Level Meter to view the signal level for each channel    Chapter 8 Metering Tools 169    170    You can view either the Analyzer or Goniometer results in the main display area  You  switch the view and set other MultiMeter parameters with the controls on the left side  of the interface     Main display in    Analyzer parameters Analyzer view Level Meter    Left      Right     ERmax    Contometer       Peak parameters Goniometer parameters Correlation Meter    While you can insert the MultiMeter directly into any channel strip  it is more commonly  used in the master channel strip of the host application   when you are working on the  overall mix     There is also a surround version of the MultiMeter  with parameters for each channel and  a slightly different layout  See Surround MultiMeter     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Using the MultiMeter Analyzer   In Analyzer mode  the MultiMeter   s main display shows the frequency spectrum of the  input signal as 31 independent frequency
216. r entirely  noise   are reduced  Changes to parameters are instantly  reflected here  so keep an eye on it     Denoiser Smoothing Parameters  The Denoiser offers the following smoothing parameters     Frequency knob and field    Transition knob and field       Time knob and field      Frequency knob and field  Adjusts how smoothing is applied to neighboring frequencies   If the Denoiser recognizes that only noise is present on a certain frequency band  the  higher you set the Frequency parameter  the more it changes the neighboring frequency  bands to avoid glass noise       Time knob and field  Sets the time required by the Denoiser to reach  or release   maximum reduction  This is the simplest form of smoothing      Transition knob and field  Adjusts how smoothing is applied to neighboring volume  levels  If the Denoiser recognizes that only noise is present in a certain volume range   the higher you set the Transition parameter  the more similar level values are changed   in order to avoid glass noise     Enhance Timing  Enhance Timing is designed to tighten up loose playing of recorded audio in a production   It can be used on a variety of materials and works in real time     Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities 251    252    While effective on suitable material  this type of real time quantization has some  limitations  It does not work well on recordings of performances that have been played  too far off the beat  The same is true for very complex  layered drum 
217. r mix  This curve approximates  mirrors  the average spectrum  of your source audio file     You can drag an audio file onto the Template Learn or Current Material Learn buttons  for use as either the template or the current material  A progress bar appears while the  Match EQ is analyzing the file  You can also load a previously saved plug in setting  or  you can import the settings of another unsaved Match EQ instance by copying and  pasting     When you click either of the Learn buttons  the View parameter is set to Automatic and  the graphic display shows the frequency curve for the function  You can review any of  the frequency curves when no file is being processed by choosing one of the other View  options     The filter curve is updated automatically each time a new template or current material  spectrum is learned or loaded when the Match button is enabled  You can alternate  between the matched  and possibly scaled and or manually modified  filter curve and a  flat response by activating deactivating the Match button     Only one of the Learn buttons can be active at a time  For example  if the Learn button  in the Template section is active and you press the Learn button in the Current Material  section  the analysis of the template file stops  the current status is used as the spectral  template  and analysis of the incoming audio signal  Current Material  begins     Note  Each time you match two audio signals  either by loading learning a new spectrum  while Matc
218. r of the audio signal arriving at its analysis input and transfers it to the synthesizer s  sound generators  The result of this process is heard at the output of the vocoder     The classic vocoder sound uses speech as the analysis signal and a synthesizer sound as  the synthesis signal  This sound was popularized in the late 1970s and early 1980s  You ll  probably know it from tracks such as    O Superman    by Laurie Anderson     Funky Town     by Lipps Inc   and numerous Kraftwerk pieces   such as    Autobahn        Europe Endless         The Robots     and    Computer World        In addition to these    singing robot    sounds  vocoding has also been used in many  films   such as with the Cylons in Battlestar Galactica  and most famously  with the voice  of Darth Vader from the Star Wars saga     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 141    142    Vocoding  as a process  is not strictly limited to vocal performances  You could use a drum  loop as the analysis signal to shape a string ensemble sound arriving at the synthesis  input     How Does a Vocoder Work    The speech analyzer and synthesizer features of a vocoder are actually two bandpass  filter banks  Bandpass filters allow a frequency band   a slice   in the overall frequency  spectrum to pass through unchanged  and cut the frequencies that fall outside the band s  range     In the EVOC 20 plug ins  these filter banks are named the Analysis and Synthesis sections   Each filter bank has a matching number of corresponding band
219. rb effect with a unique feature  It allows you to freely adjust the  envelope   the shape   of the diffuse reverb tail     Time parameters Sound parameters    Mix       The interface can be broken down into three areas       Time parameters  These determine the delay time of the original signal and reverb tail   and they change the reverb tail over time  The graphic display visually represents the  levels over time  the envelope  of the reverb  See EnVerb Time Parameters       Sound parameters  This area allows you to shape the sound of the reverb signal  You  can also split the incoming signal into two bands    with the Crossover parameter   and  set the level of the low frequency band separately  See EnVerb Sound Parameters       Mix parameter  Determines the balance between the effect  wet  and direct  dry  signals     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects 215    216    EnVerb Time Parameters  EnVerb offers the following Time parameters        Dry Signal Delay slider and field  Determines the delay of the original signal  You can  hear the dry signal only when the Mix parameter is set to a value other than 100      Predelay knob and field  Sets the time between the original signal and the starting point  of the reverb attack phase   the very beginning of the first reflection     Attack knob and field  Defines the time it takes for the reverb to climb to its peak level     Decay knob and field  Defines the time it takes for the level of the reverb to drop from  its peak to the sustain 
220. re  that these overdriven signals continue to sound good     Freeze button  Captures the current delay repeats and sustains them until the Freeze  button is turned off     Delay field  Sets the current delay time in milliseconds  this parameter is dimmed when  you synchronize the delay time to the project tempo      Sync button  Synchronizes delay repeats to the project tempo  including tempo changes      Tempo field  Sets the current delay time in beats per minute  this parameter is dimmed  when you synchronize the delay time to the project tempo      Chapter 2 Delay Effects 75    76    Groove slider and field  Determines the proximity of every second delay repeat to the  absolute grid position   in other words  how close every second delay repeat is  A  Groove setting of 50  means that every delay has the same delay time  Settings below  50  result in every second delay being played earlier in time  Settings above 50  result  in every second delay being played later in time  When you want to create dotted note  values  move the Groove slider all the way to the right  to 75    For triplets  select the  33 33  setting     Note buttons  Set the grid resolution for the delay time  These are shown as note  durations       Low Cutand High Cut sliders and fields  Frequencies below the Low Cut value and above    the High Cut value are filtered out of the source signal  You can shape the sound of  the echoes with the highpass and lowpass filters  The filters are located in the feedb
221. reely use the Stereo  Delay on mono tracks or busses when you want to create independent delays for the  two stereo sides     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    74    Note  If you use the effect on mono channel strips  the track or bus will have two channels  from the point of insertion   all Insert slots after the chosen slot will be stereo        As the parameters for the left and right delays are identical  the descriptions below only  cover the left channel   the right channel information is provided in brackets  if named  differently  Parameters that are common to both channels are shown separately     Channel Parameters    Left  Right  Input pop up menu  Choose the input signal for the two stereo sides  Options  include OFF  Left  Right  L  R  L R     Left  Right  Delay field  Sets the current delay time in milliseconds  this parameter is  dimmed when you synchronize the delay time to the project tempo      Groove slider and field  Determines the proximity of every second delay repeat to the  absolute grid position   in other words  how close every second delay repeat is     Note buttons  Set the grid resolution for the delay time  These are shown as note  durations  these are dimmed when the delay time is not synchronized with the project  tempo      Left  Right  Feedback knob and field  Set the amount of feedback for the left and right  delay signals     Crossfeed Left to Right  Crossfeed Right to Left  knob and field  Transfer the feedback signal  of the left channel to the 
222. rent sections of the Tap display  Horizontally drag the  middle of the  bright rectangle in the Overview display     The zoomed view in the Tap display updates as you drag     Creating Taps in Delay Designer  You can create new delay taps in three different ways  by using the Tap pads  by creating  them in the Identification bar  or by copying existing taps     To create taps with the Tap pad  Click the upper pad  Start      Note  Whenever you click the Start pad  it automatically erases all existing taps  Given  this behavior  after you have created your initial taps  you will want to create subsequent  taps by clicking in the Identification bar     The upper pad label changes to Tap  and a red tap recording bar appears in the strip  below the view buttons     cry    Tap         Last Tap    Click the Tap button to begin recording new taps     Click the Tap button to create new taps  These are created at the exact moments in time  of each click  adopting the rhythm of your click pattern     To finish creating taps  click the Last Tap button     This adds the final tap  ending tap recording  and assigning the last tap as the feedback  tap  for an explanation of the feedback tap  see Using Delay Designer s Master Section      Note  If you do not click the Last Tap button  tap recording automatically stops after  10 seconds or when the 26th tap is created  whichever comes first     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    To create taps in the Identification bar    Click at the appropriate po
223. requency bands  The upper section  represents the left channel  and the lower section represents the right channel  The  frequency scale displays frequencies in ascending order  from left to right    Upper and Lower Freq uency  slider and fields  Determine the highest and lowest  frequencies that will be redistributed in the stereo image     Order knob and field  Determines the number of frequency bands that the signal is  divided into  A value of 8 is usually sufficient for most tasks  but you can use up to  12 bands     Chapter 7 Imaging Processors       Metering Tools 8    You can use the Metering tools to analyze audio in a variety of ways  These plug ins offer  different facilities to the meters shown in channel strips  They have no effect on the audio  signal and are designed for use as diagnostic aids     Each meter is specifically designed to view different characteristics of an audio signal   making each suitable for particular studio situations  As examples  the BPM Counter  displays the tempo  the Correlation Meter displays the phase relationship  and the Level  Meter displays the level of an incoming audio signal     This chapter covers the following     BPM Counter  p  167    e Correlation Meter  p  168    e Level Meter Plug in  p  168    e MultiMeter  p  169    e Surround MultiMeter  p  174      Tuner  p  180     BPM Counter   The BPM Counter is used to analyze the tempo of incoming audio in beats per minute   bpm   The detection circuit looks for any transients
224. requency range that is swept  Order switches  between different algorithms  with higher  even  numbers resulting  in a heavier phasing effect  Odd order numbers result in more subtle  comb filtering effects  Feedback determines the amount of the  effect signal that is routed back into the input  This can change the  tonal color  can make the phasing effect more pronounced  or can  do both  Tone works from the center position  turn it to the left to  increase the amount of lowpass filtering  or turn it to the right to  increase the amount of highpass filtering  Mix sets the level ratio  between each phaser        Retro Chorus A subtle  vintage chorus effect  Rate sets the modulation speed and  can run freely  or be synchronized with the host application tempo  by enabling the Sync button  When synchronized  you can specify  bar  beat and note values  including triplets and dotted notes    Depth sets the strength of the effect        Robo Flanger Flexible flanging effect  Rate sets the modulation speed and can  run freely  or be synchronized with the host application tempo by  enabling the Sync button  When synchronized  you can specify bar   beat and note values  including triplets and dotted notes   Depth  sets the strength of the effect  Feedback determines the amount  of the effect signal that is routed back into the input  This can  change the tonal color  can make the flanging effect more  pronounced  or can do both  The Manual knob sets a delay time  between the source a
225. reverb tail   High Diffusion values represent a regular density  with few alterations in level  times   and panorama position over the course of the diffuse reverb signal  Low Diffusion  values result in the reflection density becoming irregular and grainy  This also affects  the stereo spectrum  As with Density  find the best balance for the signal     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects    PlatinumVerb   The PlatinumVerb allows you to edit both the early reflections and diffuse reverb tail  separately  making it easy to precisely emulate real rooms  Its dual band Reverb section  splits the incoming signal into two bands  each of which is processed and can be edited  separately     Early Reflections parameters Balance ER Reverb slider Output parameters       Reverb parameters    The interface is broken down into four parameter areas       Early Reflections parameters  Emulates the original signal s first reflections as they bounce  off the walls  ceiling  and floor of a natural room  See PlatinumVerb Early Reflections  Parameters     e Reverb parameters  Controls the diffuse reverberations  See PlatinumVerb Reverb  Parameters       Output parameters  Determines the balance between the effected  wet  and direct  dry   signals  See PlatinumVerb Output Parameters       Balance ER Reverb slider  Controls the balance between the Early Reflections and Reverb  sections  When you set the slider to either of its extreme positions  the unused section  is deactivated     Chapter 11 Reverb Effect
226. right   corner of the Amp Designer interface  It serves as the final level control for Amp Designer  and can be thought of as a    behind the speaker    volume control that sets the level of the  output that is fed to the ensuing Insert slots in the channel strip  or directly to the channel  strip output     Note  This parameter is different from the Master control  which serves the dual purpose  of sound design as well as controlling the level of the Amp section     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    27    28    Bass Amp   Bass Amp simulates the sound of several famous bass amplifiers  You can route bass  guitar and other signals directly through the Bass Amp  reproducing the sound of your  musical part played through a number of high quality bass guitar amplification systems     Model    Mid Freq    Treble    Leeann  Output Level       Bass Amp offers the following parameters       Model pop up menu  Includes the following amplifier models     American Basic  1970s era American bass amp  equipped with eight 10  speakers   Well suited for blues and rock recordings     American Deep  Based on the American Basic amp  but with strong lower mid  frequency  from 500 Hz on  emphasis  Well suited for reggae and pop recordings     American Scoop  Based on the American Basic amp  but combines the frequency  characteristics of the American Deep and American Bright  with both low mid  from  500 Hz  and upper mid  from 4 5 kHz  frequencies emphasized  Well suited for funk  and fusion recordin
227. right channel  and vice versa     Feedback Phase button  Use to invert the phase of the corresponding channel s feedback  signal     Crossfeed Phase button  Use to invert the phase of the crossfed feedback signals     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Common Parameters  Beat Sync button  Synchronizes delay repeats to the project tempo  including tempo  changes     Output Mix  Left and Right  sliders and fields  Independently control the left and right  channel signals     Low Cut and High Cut sliders and fields  Frequencies below the Low Cut value and above  the High Cut value are filtered out of the source signal     Tape Delay   Tape Delay simulates the warm sound of vintage tape echo machines  with the  convenience of easy delay time synchronization to your project tempo  The effect is  equipped with a highpass and lowpass filter in the feedback loop  simplifying the creation  of authentic dub echo effects  Tape Delay also includes an LFO for delay time modulation   which can be used to produce pleasant or unusual chorus effects  even on long delays        Feedback slider  Determines the amount of delayed and filtered signal that is routed  back to the input of the Tape Delay  Set the Feedback slider to the lowest possible  value to generate a single echo  Turn Feedback all the way up to endlessly repeat the  signal  The levels of the original signal and its taps  echo repeats  tend to accumulate   and may cause distortion  You can use the internal tape saturation circuit to ensu
228. rmine phase  differences between the left and right channels  Phase problems are easily spotted as  trace cancellations along the center line  M   mid mono      The idea of the goniometer was born with the advent of early two channel oscilloscopes   To use such devices as goniometers  users would connect the left and the right stereo  channels to the X and Y inputs  while rotating the display by 45   to produce a useful  visualization of the signal   s stereo phase     The signal trace slowly fades to black  imitating the retro glow of the tubes found in older  goniometers  while also enhancing the readability of the display     Analyzer    Left   Right Rmax         Goniometer button  Switches the main display to Goniometer mode       Auto Gain field  Sets the amount of display compensation for low input levels  You can  set Auto Gain levels in 10  increments  or set it to off     Note  To avoid confusion with the Auto Gain parameter found in other effects and  processors  such as the compressors   Auto Gain is only used as a display parameter in  the meters  It increases display levels to enhance readability  It does not change the  actual audio levels       Decay field  Determines the time it takes for the Goniometer trace to fade to black     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Using the MultiMeter   s Level Meter  The Level Meter displays the current signal level on a logarithmic decibel scale  The signal  level for each channel is represented by a blue bar        RMS and Peak le
229. rmines the distance of the virtual microphones  the listening  position  from the emulated speaker cabinet  Use higher values to make the sound  darker and less defined  This is typical of microphones when positioned further from  the sound source     Mic Angle slider  Use to define the stereo image  by changing the angle of the simulated  microphones       An angle of 0   results in a mono sound       An angle of 180   causes phase cancellations     Scanner Vibrato Effect   Scanner Vibrato simulates the scanner vibrato section of a Hammond organ  The Scanner  Vibrato is based on an analog delay line  consisting of several lowpass filters  The delay  line is scanned by a multipole capacitor  which has a rotating pickup  It is a unique effect  that cannot be simulated with simple LFOs     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 199    200       You can choose between three different vibrato and chorus types  The stereo version of  the effect features two additional parameters   Stereo Phase and Rate Right  These allow  you to set the modulation speed independently for the left and right channels     The stereo parameters of  the mono version of the  Scanner Vibrato are  hidden behind a  transparent cover     Vibrato knob  Use to choose from three Vibrato positions  V1  V2  and V3  or three  Chorus positions  C1  C2  and C3        In the Vibrato positions  only the delay line signal is heard  each with different  intensities       The three Chorus positions  C1  C2  and C3  mix the signal 
230. ro the automatic  Wah Wah function is disabled       Attack knob  Sets the time it takes for the Wah Wah filter to fully open   e Release knob  Sets the time it takes for the Wah Wah filter to close     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 155    156    A w   N    Fuzz Parameters  These parameters control the integrated distortion and compression circuits  The  compressor always precedes the Fuzz effect          Comp  Compression  Ratio knob  Sets the compression ratio     Fuzz Gain knob  Sets the level of the Fuzz  or distortion  effect       Fuzz Tone knob  Adjusts the tonal color of the fuzz effect  Low settings tend to be  warmer  and high settings are brighter and harsher     Using the Fuzz Wah  The following section provides practical tips for the Fuzz Wah parameters     Setting the Wah Wah Level with Auto Gain  The Wah Wah effect can cause the output level to vary widely  Turning Auto Gain on  compensates for this tendency and keeps the output signal within a more stable range     To hear the difference Auto Gain can make   Switch Auto Gain to on    Raise the effect level to a value just below the mixer   s clipping limit    Make a sweep with a high relative Q setting    Switch Auto Gain to off  and repeat the sweep    Important  Make sure to set a conservative master output level for your host application    before trying this  Failure to do so may result in damage to your hearing or speakers     Setting the Pedal Range  Common MIDI foot pedals have a much larger mechanical range
231. s        Trem o Tone A tremolo effect  modulation of the signal level   Rate sets the  modulation speed and can run freely  or be synchronized with the  host application tempo by enabling the Sync button  When  synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and note values  including  triplets and dotted notes   Depth sets the strength of the effect   Level sets the post tremolo gain        46 Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals    Stompbox Description    the Vibe A vibrato chorus effect based on the Scanner Vibrato unit found in  the Hammond B3 organ  You can choose from three vibrato  V1 3   or chorus  C1 3  variations with the Type knob  Rate sets the  modulation speed and can run freely  or be synchronized with the  host application tempo by enabling the Sync button  When  synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and note values  including  triplets and dotted notes   Depth sets the strength of the effect  See  Scanner Vibrato Effect for background information on this effect        Delay Pedals  This section describes the Delay effects pedals     Stompbox Description    Blue Echo A delay effect  Time sets the modulation speed and can run freely   or be synchronized with the host application tempo by enabling  the Sync button  When synchronized  you can specify bar  beat and  note values  including triplets and dotted notes   The Repeats knob  determines the number of delay repeats  Mix sets the balance  between the delayed and source signals  The Tone Cut switch  controls a fixed frequency
232. s       Dry slider  Sets the overall level of the non effect signal for all channels  Set this to a  value of 0  mute  when using Space Designer as a bus effect in an aux channel strip   Use the Send knob of each bussed channel strip to control the wet dry balance     Working with Pre Dly  Predelay  in Space Designer  Predelay is the amount of time that elapses between the original signal and the initial  early reflections of the reverberation     For a room of any given size and shape  predelay determines the distance between the   listener and the walls  ceiling  and floor  Space Designer allows you to adjust this parameter  separately from predelay  and over a greater range than what would be considered natural  for predelay     In practice  an extremely short predelay tends to make it difficult to pinpoint the position  of the signal source  It can also color the sound of the original signal  On the other hand   an excessively long predelay can be perceived as an unnatural echo  It can also divorce  the original signal from its early reflections  leaving an audible gap between the original  and reverb signals     The ideal predelay setting for different sounds depends on the properties of   or more  accurately  the envelope of   the original signal  Percussive signals generally require  shorter predelays than signals where the attack fades in gradually  such as strings  A good  rule of thumb is to use the longest predelay possible before undesirable side effects  such  as
233. s   if the analysis filter  bank has five bands  1  2  3  4  and 5   there will be a corresponding set of five bands in  the synthesis filter bank  Band 1 in the analysis bank is matched to Band 1 in the synthesis  bank  Band 2 to Band 2  and so on     The audio signal arriving at the analysis input passes through the analysis filter bank   where it is divided into bands     An envelope follower is coupled to each filter band  The envelope follower of each band  tracks  or follows  any volume changes in the audio source   or  more specifically  the  portion of the audio that has been allowed to pass by the associated bandpass filter  In  this way  the envelope follower of each band generates dynamic control signals     These control signals are then sent to the synthesis filter bank  where they control the  levels of the corresponding synthesis filter bands  This is done via voltage controlled  amplifiers  VCAs  in analog vocoders  This allows any volume changes to the bands in  the analysis filter bank to be imposed on the matching bands in the synthesis filter bank   These filter changes are heard as a synthetic reproduction of the original input signal   or  a mix of the two filter bank signals     The more bands a vocoder offers  the more precisely the original sound   s character will  be remodeled  The EVOC plug ins offer up to 20 bands per bank  To ensure their musical  usefulness  you have full control over the output level of each bandpass filter  facilitating  uniqu
234. s  If the British Blues Combo is too  clean for your needs  combine it with Pedalboard   s Hi Drive stompbox for an aggressive  blues tone  or the Candy Fuzz stompbox for an explosive rock tone  See Distortion Pedals  and Pedalboard     British Combos   The British Combos capture the brash  treble rich sound that will forever be associated  with 1960s British rock and pop  The sonic signature of these amps is characterized by  their high end response  yet they are rarely harsh sounding due to a sweet distortion  and smooth natural compression     Model Description    British Combo A 2x 12  combo based on the early 1960s amps that powered the  British Invasion  Perfect for chiming chords and stabbing solos        Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 15    16    Model Description    Small British Combo A 1x 12  combo with half the power of the British Combo  this amp  offers a slightly darker  less open tone        Boutique British Combo A 2x 12  combo that is a modern take on the original 1960s sound   The tone is thicker  with stronger lows and milder highs than the  other British Combos        Tip  Using high Treble and Presence knob settings that might become strident on other  amp types can sound great with the British Combos     British Alternatives   The late 1960s amplifier heads and combos that inspired the Sunshine models are loud  and aggressive  with full bodied mid frequencies  These amps are not just for single note  solos and power chords  as they can sound great with big  
235. s  Mention of  third party products is for informational purposes only  and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a  recommendation  Apple assumes no responsibility with  regard to the performance or use of these products        Preface    Chapter 1    Chapter 2    Chapter 3    Chapter 4      o oNN    11    28  29  35    51  51  72  72  73  75    77  78  79  80  81  81  82    85  86  87  88  92  94  96  98    Contents    An Introduction to the Logic Pro Effects  About the Logic Pro Effects   About the Logic Pro Documentation  Additional Resources    Amps and Pedals  Amp Designer  Bass Amp   Guitar Amp Pro  Pedalboard    Delay Effects  Delay Designer  Echo   Sample Delay  Stereo Delay  Tape Delay    Distortion Effects  Bitcrusher   Clip Distortion  Distortion Effect  Distortion Il  Overdrive   Phase Distortion    Dynamics Processors   Types of Dynamics Processors  Adaptive Limiter   Compressor   DeEsser   Ducker   Enveloper   Expander       Chapter 5    Chapter 6    Chapter 7    Chapter 8    Chapter 9    100  103  106  107  107    111  112  115  116  117  121  127  129    131  131  137  141  153  157    161  161  162  165    167  167  168  168  169  174  180    183  184  184  186  187  187  190  191    Limiter   Multipressor   Noise Gate   Silver Compressor  Silver Gate   Surround Compressor    Equalizers  Channel EQ   DJ EQ   Fat EQ   Linear Phase EQ  Match EQ  Single Band EQs  Silver EQ    Filter Effects   AutoFilter   EVOC 20 Filterbank  EVOC 20 TrackOscillator  Fuzz Wah  
236. s  These room characteristic sample recordings are known as  impulse responses     Convolution reverbs work by convolving  combining  an audio signal with the impulse  response recording of a room s reverb characteristics  See Space Designer Convolution  Reverb     AVerb    AVerb is a simple reverb effect that employs a single parameter  Density Time  to control  both the early reflections and diffuse reverb tail  It is a quick and easy tool for creating a  range of interesting space and echo effects  The AVerb may not be the best choice for  simulating real acoustic environments  however          Predelay slider and field  Determines the time between the original signal and the early  reflections of the reverb signal       Reflectivity knob and field  Defines how reflective the imaginary walls  ceiling  and floor  are   in other words  how hard the walls are  and what they   re made of  Glass  stone   timber  carpet  and other materials have a dramatic impact on the tone of the reverb       Room Size knob and field  Defines the dimensions of simulated rooms     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects      Density Time slider and field  Determines both the density and duration of the reverb     Low values tend to generate clearly discernible early reflection clusters  generating  something similar to an echo  High values result in a more reverb like effect     e Mix slider and field  Sets the balance between the effect  wet  and direct  dry  signals     EnVerb    EnVerb is a versatile reve
237. s  byp  above the green  black  and below the blue  white   keys excludes notes from correction  This is useful for blue notes  Blue notes are notes  that slide between pitches  making the major and minor status of the keys difficult to  identify  As you may know  one of the major differences between C minor and C major  is the Eb  E flat  and Bb  B flat   instead of the E and B  Blues singers glide between these  notes  creating an uncertainty or tension between the scales  Use of the bypass buttons  allows you to exclude particular keys from changes  leaving them as they were     If you enable the Bypass All button  the input signal is passed through unprocessed and  uncorrected  This is useful for spot corrections to pitch through use of automation  Bypass  All is optimized for seamless bypass enabling or disabling in all situations     Tip  You ll often find that it   s best to correct only the notes with the most harmonic  gravity  For example  choose    sus4    from the Scale pop up menu  and set the Root note  to match the project key  This will limit correction to the root note  the fourth  and the  fifth of the key scale  Activate the bypass buttons for all other notes and only the most  important and sensitive notes will be corrected  while all other singing remains untouched     Setting the Pitch Correction Reference Tuning  Choose File  gt  Project Settings  gt  Tuning to determine the tuning reference for all software  instruments     If you turn on the Use Globa
238. s 221    222    PlatinumVerb Early Reflections Parameters    The PlatinumVerb offers the following Early Reflections parameters          Predelay slider and field  Determines the amount of time between the start of the original  signal and the arrival of the early reflections  Extremely short Predelay settings can  color the sound and make it difficult to pinpoint the position of the signal source  Overly  long Predelay settings can be perceived as an unnatural echo and can divorce the  original signal from its early reflections  leaving an audible gap between them     The optimum Predelay setting depends on the type of input signal   or more precisely   the envelope of the input signal  Percussive signals generally require shorter predelays  than signals where the attack fades in gradually  A good working method is to use the  longest possible Predelay value before you start to hear undesirable side effects  such  as an audible echo  When you reach this point  reduce the Predelay setting slightly       Room Shape slider and field  Defines the geometric form of the room  The numeric value   3 to 7  represents the number of corners in the room  The graphic display visually  represents this setting       Room Size slider and field  Determines the dimensions of the room  The numeric value  indicates the length of the room   s walls   the distance between two corners       Stereo Base slider and field  Defines the distance between the two virtual microphones  that are used to cap
239. s EQ  shapes the sound of incoming audio by  changing the level of specific frequency bands     Equalization is one of the most commonly used audio processes  both for music projects  and in post production work for video  You can use EQ to subtly or significantly shape  the sound of an audio file  instrument  or project by adjusting specific frequencies or  frequency ranges     All EQs are specialized filters that allow certain frequencies to pass through unchanged  while raising  boosting  or lowering  cutting  the level of other frequencies  Some EQs  can be used in a    broad brush    fashion  to boost or cut a large range of frequencies  Other  EQs  particularly parametric and multiband EQs  can be used for more precise control     The simplest types of EQs are single band EQs  which include low cut and high cut   lowpass and highpass  shelving  and parametric EQs     Multiband EQs  such as the Channel EQ  Fat EQ  or Linear Phase EQ  combine several  filters in one unit  enabling you to control a large part of the frequency spectrum   Multiband EQs allow you to independently set the frequency  bandwidth  and Q factor  of each frequency spectrum band  This provides extensive  and precise  tone shaping on  any audio source  be it an individual audio signal or an overall mix     Logic Pro includes a variety of single band and multiband EQs     This chapter covers the following   e Channel EQ  p  112    e DJEQ  p  115    e Fat EQ  p  116    e Linear Phase EQ  p  117    e Mat
240. s Oscillator  In both frequency shifter modes and the ring modulator OSC mode  the internal sine  wave oscillator is used to modulate the amplitude of the input signal       In the frequency shifter modes  the Frequency parameter controls the amount of  frequency shifting  up and or down  applied to the input signal     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 193    194      In the ring modulator OSC mode  the Frequency parameter controls the frequency  content  timbre  of the resulting effect  This timbre can range from subtle tremolo  effects to clangorous metallic sounds     Freq Shift Ring Mod         Frequency control  Sets the frequency of the sine oscillator     Lin ear  and Exp onential  buttons  Switch the scaling of the Frequency control     e Exp onential   Exponential scaling offers extremely small increments around the  0 point  which is useful for programming slow moving phasing and tremolo effects       Lin ear   Linear scaling resolution is even across the entire control range       Env Follow slider and field  Determines the impact of incoming signal levels on the  oscillator modulation depth     LFO slider and field  Determines the amount of oscillator modulation by the LFO     Using the Ringshifter   s Delay  The effect signal is routed through a delay  following the oscillator        Feedback Stereo Wi      Time knob and field  Sets the delay time  This is in Hz when running freely  or in note  values  including triplet and dotted notes  when the Sync button is active
241. s brighter and more cutting than the Condenser model  At the  same time  the lower mid frequency range is less pronounced  making this model more  suitable for miking rock guitar tones     Tip  Combining both microphone types can sound quite interesting  Duplicate the  guitar track  and insert Guitar Amp Pro as an insert effect on both tracks  Select different  microphone types in each Guitar Amp Pro instance  while retaining identical settings  for all other parameters  and mix the track signal levels  You can  of course  choose to  vary any other parameters     Setting the Guitar Amp Pro Output Level   The Output slider is found at the bottom  below the Effects section  It serves as the final  level control for Guitar Amp Pro and can be thought of as a    behind the speaker    volume  control that is used to set the level fed to the ensuing plug in slots on the channel strip  or to Output channel strips     Note  This parameter is different from the Master control  which serves the dual purpose  of sound design as well as controlling the level of the Amp section     Pedalboard    The Pedalboard simulates the sound of a number of well loved and famous    stompbox     pedal effects  You can process any audio signal with a combination of stompboxes     You can add  remove  and reorder pedals  The signal flow runs from left to right in the  Pedal area  The addition of two discrete busses  coupled with splitter and mixer units   enables you to experiment with sound design and pr
242. s can be the   entire project or individual channel strips within it  is analyzed  These two spectra are   then matched  creating a filter curve  This filter curve adapts the frequency response of  the current material to match that of the template  Before applying the filter curve  you  can modify it by boosting or cutting any number of frequencies  or by inverting the curve     The Analyzer allows you to visually compare the frequency spectrum of the source file  and the resulting curve  making it easier to make manual corrections at specific points  within the spectrum     You can use the Match EQ in different ways  depending on your intended outcome and  the audio you re working with  In general  you will want to make your mix sound similar  to an existing recording   either your own or that of another artist     Note  Although the Match EQ acoustically matches the frequency curve of two audio  signals  it does not match any dynamic differences between the two signals     Chapter5 Equalizers 121    122    Match EQ Parameters  The Match EQ offers the following parameters        Match EQ Analyzer Parameters    Analyzer button  Turns the Analyzer function on or off       Pre Post button  Determines whether the Analyzer looks at the signal before  Pre  or  after  Post  the filter curve is applied     View pop up menu  Sets the information shown on the graphic display  Choices are     Automatic  Displays information for the current function  as determined by the active  button
243. s shown as a percentage value rather than in degrees  The value 100  or    100   indicates the greatest possible distance between the modulation phases of all voices     e Spread slider and field  Distributes voices across the stereo or surround field  Set a value  of 200  to artificially expand the stereo or surround base  Note that monaural  compatibility may suffer if you choose to do this     e Mix slider and field  Determines the balance between dry and wet signals       Effect Volume knob and field  Determines the level of the effects signal  This is a useful  tool that compensates for changes in volume caused by changes to the Voices  parameter     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 185    186    Note  When you are using the Ensemble effect in surround  the input signal is converted  to mono before processing  In other words  you insert the Ensemble effect as a  multi mono instance     Flanger Effect   The Flanger effect works in much the same way as the Chorus effect  but it uses a  significantly shorter delay time  In addition  the effect signal can be fed back into the  input of the delay line     Flanging is typically used to create changes that are described as adding a spacey or  underwater quality to input signals        Feedback slider and field  Determines the amount of the effect signal that is routed back  into the input  This can change the tonal color and or make the sweeping effect more  pronounced  Negative Feedback values invert the phase of the routed signal 
244. s the Analyzer on or off     Pre Post EQ button  Determines whether the Analyzer shows the frequency curve before  or after EQ is applied  when Analyzer mode is active     Resolution pop up menu  Sets the sample resolution for the Analyzer  with the following  menu items  low  1024 points   medium  2048 points   and high  4096 points      Linear Phase EQ Graphic Display Section    Band On Off buttons  Click to turn the corresponding band on or off  Each button icon  indicates the filter type     Band 1 is a highpass filter    Band 2 is a low shelving filter    Bands 3 through 6 are parametric bell filters   Band 7 is a high shelving filter     Band 8 is a lowpass filter     Chapter 5 Equalizers    Graphic display  Shows the current curve of each EQ band       Drag horizontally in the section of the display that encompasses each band to adjust  the frequency of the band       Drag vertically in the section of the display that encompasses each band to adjust  the gain of each band  except bands 1 and 8   The display reflects your changes  immediately       Drag the pivot point in each band to adjust the Q factor  Q is shown beside the cursor  when the mouse is moved over a pivot point     Linear Phase EQ Parameter Section    Frequency fields  Adjust the frequency of each band       Gain Slope fields  Set the amount of gain for each band  For bands 1 and 8  this changes    the slope of the filter     Q fields  Adjust the Q or resonance for each band   the range of frequencies ar
245. scale  with the C above  middle C displayed as C4  and middle C displayed as C3     Tuning Adjustment slider and field  Sets the pitch of the note used as the basis for tuning   By default  the Tuner is set to the project   s Tuning parameter value  Drag the knob to   the left to lower the pitch corresponding to A  Drag the knob to the right to raise the  pitch corresponding to A  The current value is displayed in the field     To use the Tuner  Insert the Tuner into an audio channel strip     Play a single note on the instrument and watch the display  If the note is flat or sharp  of  the Keynote   the segments to the left or right of center are illuminated  indicating how  far in cents the note is off pitch     Adjust the tuning of your instrument until the indicator is centered in the graphic tuning  display     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    181       Modulation Effects 9    Modulation effects are used to add motion and depth to your sound     Effects such as chorus  flanging  and phasing are well known examples  Modulation effects  typically delay the incoming signal by a few milliseconds and use an LFO to modulate  the delayed signal  The LFO may also be used to modulate the delay time in some effects     A low frequency oscillator  LFO  is much like the sound generating oscillators in  synthesizers  but the frequencies generated by an LFO are so low that they can t be heard   Therefore  they are used only for modulation purposes  LFO parameters include speed   or frequenc
246. show the effective signal average  and provide a representative  overview of perceived volume levels       The Peak mode shows level peaks accurately       Scale  shown in the main display   Indicates the scale of levels  Adjusting the scale is  useful when analyzing highly compressed material  as it makes it easier to identify small  level differences  Drag vertically on the scale to adjust it     Using the Surround MultiMeter Goniometer    A goniometer helps you to judge the coherence of the stereo image and determine phase    differences between the left and right channels  Phase problems are easily spotted as    trace cancellations along the center line  M   mid mono      The idea of the goniometer was born with the advent of early two channel oscilloscopes   To use such devices as goniometers  users would connect the left and the right stereo    channels to the X and Y inputs  while rotating the display by 45   to produce a useful    visualization of the signal   s stereo phase  The signal trace slowly fades to black  imitating  the retro glow of the tubes found in older goniometers  while also enhancing the    readability of the display     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Because the Surround MultiMeter Goniometer is dealing with multichannel signals  the  display is divided into multiple segments  as shown in the image  Each segment indicates  a speaker position  When the surround panner is moved in a channel strip  the indicator  changes accordingly  This indicates not on
247. sition        To copy taps in the Identification bar    Option drag a selection of one or more taps to the appropriate position     The delay time of copied taps is set to the drag position     Delay Designer Tap Creation Suggestions   The fastest way to create multiple taps is to use the Tap pads  If you have a specific rhythm  in mind  you might find it easier to tap out your rhythm on dedicated hardware controller  buttons  instead of using mouse clicks  If you have a MIDI controller  you can assign the  Tap pads to buttons on your device  For information about assigning controllers  see the  Control Surfaces Support manual     Note  Whenever you click the Start Tap pad  it automatically erases all existing taps  Given  this behavior  after you create your initial taps you will want to create subsequent taps  by clicking in the Identification bar     After a tap has been created  you can freely adjust its position  or you can remove it if it  was created accidentally  For details  see Moving and Deleting Taps in Delay Designer     Identifying Taps in Delay Designer   Taps are assigned letters  based on their order of creation  The first tap to be created is  assigned as Tap A  the second tap is assigned as Tap B  and so on  Once assigned  each  tap is always identified by the same letter  even when moved in time  and therefore  reordered  For example  if you initially create three taps they will be named Tap A  Tap B   and Tap C  If you then change the delay time of Tap B 
248. so that it precedes Tap A  it will  still be called Tap B     Chapter 2 Delay Effects 57    58    The Identification bar shows the letter of each visible tap  The Tap Delay field of the Tap  parameter bar displays the letter of the currently selected tap  or the letter of the tap  being edited when multiple taps are selected  for details  see Selecting Taps in   Delay Designer      Selecting Taps in Delay Designer  There will always be at least one selected tap  You can easily distinguish selected taps by  color   the toggle bar icons and the Identification bar letters of selected taps are white        ey Tap SE    To select a tap  Do one of the following     Click a tap in the Tap display   Click the appropriate tap letter in the Identification bar     Click one of the arrows to the left of the Tap name to select the next or previous tap     Chapter 2 Delay Effects      Open the pop up menu to the right of the Tap name  and choose the appropriate tap  letter            5750 0ms      Delay       To select multiple taps  Do one of the following       Drag across the background of the Tap display to select multiple taps       Shift click specific taps in the Tap display to select multiple nonadjacent taps     Moving and Deleting Taps in Delay Designer  You can move a tap backward or forward in time  or completely remove it     Note  When you move a tap  you are actually editing its delay time     To move a selected tap in time    Select the tap in the Identification bar  and dr
249. sound  of early digital audio devices  to create artificial aliasing by dividing the sample rate  or  to distort signals until they are unrecognizable          Drive slider and field  Sets the amount of gain in decibels applied to the input signal     Note  Raising the Drive level tends to increase the amount of clipping at the output of  the Bitcrusher as well       Resolution slider and field  Sets the bit rate  between 1 and 24 bits   This alters the  calculation precision of the process  Lowering the value increases the number of  sampling errors  generating more distortion  At extremely low bit rates  the amount of  distortion can be greater than the level of the usable signal     e Waveform display  Shows the impact of parameters on the distortion process       Downsampling slider and field  Reduces the sample rate  A value of 1 x leaves the signal  unchanged  a value of 2 x halves the sample rate  and a value of 10 x reduces the  sample rate to one tenth of the original signal   For example  if you set Downsampling  to 10x  a 44 1 kHz signal is sampled at just 4 41 kHz      Note  Downsampling has no impact on the playback speed or pitch of the signal       Mode buttons  Set the distortion mode to Folded  Cut  or Displaced  Signal peaks that  exceed the clip level are processed     Note  The Clip Level parameter has a significant impact on the behavior of all three  modes  This is reflected in the Waveform display  so try each mode button and adjust  the Clip Level slid
250. speakers  Don   t be surprised if you get a deeper   richer tone from a 10  speaker than from a large 4 x 12  cabinet  Try several sizes and  choose the one that works best for your music     Single Speakers or Multiple Speakers   Guitarists sometimes use cabinets with multiple speakers  and not only for the larger  sound they tend to provide  Phase cancellations occur between the speakers  adding  texture and interest to the tone  Much of the    classic rock    sound  for example  has to do  with the tonal peaks and dips caused by this interaction between the speakers in a 4x 12   cabinet     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 19    Amp Designer Cabinet Reference Table   You can choose a cabinet model from the Cabinet pop up menu on the black bar at the  bottom of Amp Designer   s interface  The table below covers the properties of each cabinet  model available in Amp Designer     Cabinet Description       Tweed 1 x 12 A 12  open back cabinet from the 1950s with a warm and smooth  tone   Tweed 4 x 10 A 4x 10  open back cabinet that was originally conceived for    bassists  but guitarists love its sparkling presence  An authentic late  1950s sound                 Tweed 1 x 10 A single 10  open back combo amp cabinet from the 1950s with a  smooth sound    Blackface 4 x 10 Classic open back cabinet with four 10  speakers  Its tone is deeper  and darker than the Tweed 4 x 10    Silverface 2 x 12 An open back model from the 1960s that provides great low end  punch    Blackface 1 x 10 An o
251. sponsive U V detection is  When this knob is turned  to the right  more of the individual unvoiced portions of the input signal are recognized   When high settings are used  the increased sensitivity to unvoiced signals can lead to  the U V sound source   determined by the Mode menu  as described in    Mode menu     below   being used on the majority of the input signal  including voiced signals   Sonically  this results in a sound that resembles a radio signal that is breaking up and  contains a lot of static  or noise       Mode menu  Sets the sound sources that can be used to replace the unvoiced content  of the input signal  You can choose between the following     e Noise  Uses noise alone for the unvoiced portions of the sound   e Noise   Synth  Uses noise and the synthesizer for the unvoiced portions of the sound       Blend  Uses the analysis signal after it has passed through a highpass filter for the  unvoiced portions of the sound  The Sensitivity parameter has no effect when this  setting is used       Level knob  Controls the volume of the signal used to replace the unvoiced content of  the input signal     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    Important  Take care with the Level knob  particularly when a high Sensitivity value is  used  to avoid internally overloading the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator     EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Synthesis In Parameters  The Synthesis In section controls various aspects of the tracking signal for the synthesizer   The tracking signal is used to 
252. ssing   for example  when you have inserted an effect that doesn   t have its  own gain control  or when you want to change the level of a track for a remix version          Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of gain       Phase Invert Left and Right buttons  Invert the phase of the left and right channels   respectively       Balance knob and field  Adjusts the balance of the incoming signal between the left  and right channels       Swap L R  Left Right  button  Swaps the left and right output channels  The swapping  occurs after the Balance parameter in the signal path       Mono button  Outputs the summed mono signal on both the left and right channels     Note  The Gain plug in is available in mono  mono to stereo  and stereo instances  In  mono and mono to stereo modes  only one Phase Invert button is available  In the mono  version  the Stereo Balance  Swap Left Right  and Mono parameters are disabled     Chapter 14 Utilities and Tools    Using Phase Inversion   Inverting phase is useful for dealing with time alignment problems  particularly those  caused by simultaneous recording with multiple microphones  When you invert the  phase of a signal heard in isolation  it sounds identical to the original  When the signal  is heard in conjunction with other signals  however  phase inversion may have an audible  effect  For example  if you place microphones above and below a snare drum  you may  find that inverting the phase of either microphone can improve  or ruin  the
253. t   and s s  stereo input to stereo output    Note  Set Stereo Mode to m s if the input signal is mono  and to s s if the input signal  is stereo  In s s mode  the left and right stereo channels are processed by separate filter  banks  When you use m s mode on a stereo input signal  the signal is first summed to  mono before it is passed to the filter banks       Stereo Width knob  Distributes the output signals of the Synthesis section s filter bands  in the stereo field     e At the left position  the outputs of all bands are centered     At the centered position  the outputs of all bands ascend from left to right       At the right position  the bands are output   alternately   to the left and right  channels     Fuzz Wah   The Fuzz Wah plug in emulates classic wah wah effects often used with a clavinet  and  it adds compression and fuzz distortion effects as well  The name wah wah comes from  the sound it produces  It has been a popular effect    usually a pedal effect    with electric  guitarists since the days of Jimi Hendrix  The pedal controls the cutoff frequency of a  bandpass  lowpass  or   less commonly   highpass filter     Getting to Know the Fuzz Wah Interface  The Fuzz Wah interface is broken down into the following sections     Effect Order buttons    Fuzz parameters       Wah parameters   Auto Wah parameters      Effect Order buttons  Select whether the wah wah effect precedes the fuzz effect in the  signal chain   Wah Fuzz   or vice versa   Fuzz Wah  See Ef
254. t possible Predelay value before you start to hear undesirable side effects  such  as an audible echo  When you reach this point  reduce the Predelay setting slightly       Room Shape slider and field  Defines the geometric form of the room  The numeric value   3 to 7  represents the number of corners in the room  The graphic display visually  represents this setting       Room Size slider and field  Determines the dimensions of the room  The numeric value  indicates the length of the room   s walls   the distance between two corners       Stereo Base slider and field  Defines the distance between the two virtual microphones  that are used to capture the signal in the simulated room     Note  Spacing the microphones slightly farther apart than the distance between two  human ears generally delivers the best  and most realistic  results  This parameter is  available only in stereo instances of the effect     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects 219    220    GoldVerb Reverb Parameters  The GoldVerb offers the following Reverb parameters          Initial Delay slider and field  Sets the time between the original signal and the diffuse    reverb tail  If you re going for a natural sounding  harmonic reverb  the transition  between the early reflections and the reverb tail should be as smooth and seamless as  possible  Set the Initial Delay parameter so that it is as long as possible  without a  noticeable gap between the early reflections and the reverb tail       Spread slider and field  
255. te them  For example  when  you are recording a drum kit and using the Noise Gate to isolate the sound of the snare  drum  the hi hat may also open the gate in many cases  To remedy this  use the side chain  controls to isolate the desired trigger signal with the High Cut and Low Cut filters     Important  The side chain signal is used only as a detector trigger in this situation  The  filters are used to isolate particular trigger signals in the side chain source  but they have  no influence on the actual gated signal   the audio being routed through the Noise Gate     To use the side chain filters  Click the Monitor button to hear how the High Cut and Low Cut filters will affect the  incoming trigger signal     Drag the High Cut slider to set the upper frequency  Trigger signals above this are filtered     Drag the Low Cut slider to set the lower frequency  Trigger signals below this are filtered     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    106    The filters allow only very high  loud  signal peaks to pass  In the drum kit example  you  could remove the hi hat signal  which is higher in frequency  with the High Cut filter and  allow the snare signal to pass  Turn monitoring off to set a suitable Threshold level more  easily     Silver Compressor  The Silver Compressor is a simplified version of the Compressor  for usage tips  see Using  the Compressor         Gain Reduction meter  Shows the amount of compression in real time     Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level
256. ted by Amp Designer can be combined in a  number of ways to radically or subtly alter the tone  Virtual microphones are used to pick  up the signal of the emulated amplifier and cabinet  You can choose from three different  microphone types  and you can reposition them        12    Amp Designer also emulates classic guitar amplifier effects  including spring reverb   vibrato  and tremolo     The Amp Designer interface can be broken down into four general sections in terms of  different kinds of parameters     Amp parameters Effects parameters Amp parameters    name a    L yee d              Microphone parameters      Model parameters  The Model pop up menu is found at the left of the black bar at the  bottom  It is used to choose a preconfigured model  consisting of an amplifier  a cabinet   an EQ type  and a microphone type  See Choosing an Amp Designer Model  The  model customizing parameters on the black bar allow you to independently choose  the type of amplifier and cabinet  See Building a Customized Amp Designer Combo   The EQ type is chosen from the EQ pop up menu above the Bass  Mids  and Treble  knobs in the knobs section  See Using Amp Designer s Equalizer       Amp parameters  Located at each end of the knobs section  these parameters are used  to set an amp s input gain  presence  and output level  See Using Amp Designer s Gain   Presence  and Master Controls       Effects parameters  Located in the center of the knobs section  these parameters allow  you to contr
257. tended Parameters area   Introduces an additional allpass filter into  the signal path  An allpass filter shifts the phase angle of a signal  influencing its stereo  image       All Pass Left and All Pass Right sliders and fields  Extended Parameters area   Determines  the frequency at which the phase shift crosses 90    the half way point of the total 180     for each of the stereo channels  In surround instances  the other channels are  automatically assigned values that fall between the two settings     Chapter9 Modulation Effects 189    190    Phaser Effect   The Phaser effect combines the original signal with a copy that is slightly out of phase  with the original  This means that the amplitudes of the two signals reach their highest  and lowest points at slightly different times  The timing differences between the two  signals are modulated by two independent LFOs  In addition  the Phaser includes a filter  circuit and a built in envelope follower that tracks volume changes in the input signal   generating a dynamic control signal  This control signal alters the sweep range  Sonically   phasing is used to create whooshing  sweeping sounds that wander through the frequency  spectrum  It is a commonly used guitar effect  but it is suitable for a range of signals        Phaser Feedback Section    Filter button  Activates the filter section  which processes the feedback signal       LP and HP knobs and fields  Set the cutoff frequency of the filter section s lowpass  LP   a
258. ter 6 Filter Effects    e Resonance knob  Resonance is responsible for the basic sonic character of the  vocoder   low settings result in a soft character  whereas high settings lead to a more  snarling  sharp character  Technically  increasing the Resonance value emphasizes the  middle frequency of each frequency band     Using Formant Stretch and Formant Shift  Formant Stretch and Formant Shift are significant Formant Filter parameters that you can  use separately or in combination  see EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Formant Filter Parameters      When Formant Stretch is set to 0  the width and distribution of the bands in the Synthesis  filter bank at the bottom matches the width of the bands in the Analysis filter bank at   the top  Low values narrow the width of each band in the Synthesis bank  whereas high  values widen the bands  The control range is expressed as a ratio of the overall bandwidth     When Formant Shift is set to 0  the positions of the bands in the Synthesis filter bank  match the positions of the bands in the Analysis filter bank  Positive values move the  Synthesis filter bank bands up in frequency  whereas negative values move them down   in  respect to the Analysis filter bank band positions     When combined  Formant Stretch and Formant Shift alter the formant structure of the  resulting vocoder sound  which can lead to some interesting timbre changes  For example   using speech signals and tuning Formant Shift up results in    Mickey Mouse    effects    
259. ter settings of pedals added in import mode are also imported     To replace a pedal setting in the Pedal area with an imported pedal setting  Click the pedal you want to replace in the Pedal area  It becomes highlighted with a blue  outline     Click the stompbox in the Pedal Browser to replace the selected pedal  or pedal setting   in the Pedal area  The blue outlines of the selected pedal in the Pedal area and Pedal  Browser blink on and off to indicate an imported setting  The setting name area at the  bottom of the Pedal Browser displays    Click selected item again to revert        Note  If you want to make your replacement permanent  click the background in the  Pedal Browser  or click the Import Mode button     To restore the selected pedal   s previous setting  click the highlighted stompbox in the  Pedal Browser  The Import Mode button and the outline of the selected pedal  in the  Pedal area  become solidly highlighted  indicating that the original setting has been  restored     Using Pedalboard   s Pedal Area   Pedalboard   s stompbox effect pedals not only resemble their physical counterparts  they  are also used in much the same way   without the inconvenience of patch cords  power  supplies  and screws or locking mechanisms  The Pedal area layout mirrors a traditional  pedalboard  with signals running from left to right     RATE DEPTH    N Tone    Fat      Dive 6  Level  Fast     Slow      SQUASH  COMPRESSOR  O            Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals 39    40    T
260. tereo effect       Correlation values lower than 0 indicate that out of phase material is present  which  can lead to phase cancellations if the stereo signal is combined into a monaural signal     Level Meter Plug in   The Level Meter displays the current signal level on a decibel scale  The signal level for  each channel is represented by a blue bar  When the level exceeds 0 dB  the portion of  the bar to the right of the 0 dB point turns red     Chapter 8 Metering Tools    Stereo instances of the Level Meter show independent left and right bars  whereas mono  instances display a single bar  Surround instances display a bar for each channel   in a  vertical rather than horizontal orientation        The current peak values are displayed numerically  superimposed over the graphic display   You can reset these values by clicking in the display     The Level Meter can be set to display levels using Peak  RMS  or Peak  amp  RMS characteristics   Choose the appropriate setting in the pop up menu below the graphic display  RMS levels  appear as dark blue bars  Peak levels appear as light blue bars  You can also choose to  view both Peak and RMS levels simultaneously     Peak and RMS Explained   The peak value is the highest level that the signal will reach  The RMS  root mean square   value is the effective value of the total signal  In other words  it is a measurement of the  continuous power of the signal     Human hearing is optimized for capturing continuous signals  making ou
261. ters  The main filter parameters are found at the lower left corner of the interface        Filter On Off button  Switches the filter section on and off          Filter Mode knob  Determines the filter mode     6 dB  LP   Bright  good general purpose filter mode  It can be used to retain the top  end of most material  while still providing some filtering          12 dB  LP   Useful where you want a warmer sound  without drastic filter effects  It is  handy for smoothing out bright reverbs     BP  6 dB per octave design  Reduces the lower and high end of the signal  leaving  the frequencies around the cutoff frequency intact          HP  12 dB per octave two pole design  Reduces the level of frequencies that fall  below the cutoff frequency     Reso nance  knob  Emphasizes frequencies above  around  or below the cutoff frequency   The impact of the resonance knob on the sound is highly dependent on the chosen  filter mode  with steeper filter modes resulting in more pronounced tonal changes     Using Space Designer s Filter Envelope   The filter envelope is shown in the main display when the Filter Env button is active  It  provides control of the filter cutoff frequency over time  All filter envelope parameters  can be adjusted either numerically in the parameter bar or graphically in the main display  using the techniques discussed in Setting Space Designer s Envelope Parameters     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    Note  Activation of the filter envelope autom
262. than AB recordings  so they can lack  asense of perceived width when played back  XY recordings can be mixed down to mono     Understanding MS Miking   To make a Middle Side  MS  recording  two microphones are positioned as closely together  as possible   usually on a stand or hung from the studio ceiling  One is a cardioid  or  omnidirectional  microphone that directly faces the sound source you want to record   in  a straight alignment  The other is a bidirectional microphone  with its axes pointing to  the left and right of the sound source at 90   angles  The cardioid microphone records the  middle signal to one side of a stereo recording  The bidirectional microphone records  the side signal to the other side of a stereo recording  MS recordings made in this way  can be decoded by the Direction Mixer     When MS recordings are played back  the side signal is used twice     As recorded      Panned hard left and phase reversed  panned hard right    MS is ideal for all situations where you need to retain absolute mono compatibility  The  advantage of MS recordings over XY recordings is that the stereo middle is positioned  on the main recording direction  on axis  of the cardioid microphone  This means that  slight fluctuations in frequency response that occur off the on axis   as is the case with  every microphone   are less troublesome  because the recording always retains mono  compatibility     Stereo Spread   Stereo Spread is typically used when mastering  There are se
263. the  same value  Settings below 50  result in every second increment being shorter in time   Settings above 50  result in every second grid increment being longer in time     Chapter 2 Delay Effects 69    70    Use subtle variations of the grid position of every second increment  values between  45  and 55   to create a less rigid rhythmic feel  This can deliver very human timing  variations  Use of extremely high Swing values are unsubtle as they place every second  increment directly beside the subsequent increment  Make use of higher values to  create interesting and intricate double rhythms with some taps  while retaining the  grid to lock other taps into more rigid synchronization with the project tempo     Using Delay Designer s Master Section  The Master section incorporates two global functions  delay feedback and dry wet mix     In simple delays  the only way for the delay to repeat is to use feedback  Because  Delay Designer offers 26 taps  you can use these taps to create repeats  rather than  requiring discreet feedback controls for each tap     Delay Designer   s global Feedback parameter does  however  allow you to send the output  of one user defined tap back through the effect input  to create a self sustaining rhythm  or pattern  This tap is known as the feedback tap             Tap A     6 0dB       Mix wet    dy             Feedback button  Enables or disables the feedback tap     Feedback Tap pop up menu  Used to choose a tap as the feedback tap       Feed
264. the bottom  Reverb can be added to either the Tremolo or Vibrato  effect  or used independently       Reverb pop up menu  Choose one of the three types of spring reverb       Level knob  Sets the amount of reverb applied to the pre amplified amp signal     Setting Guitar Amp Pro Microphone Parameters   After choosing a speaker cabinet from the Speaker menu  you can set the type of  microphone you want to be emulated  and where the microphone is placed in relation  to the speaker  The Microphone Position parameters are available in the yellow area to  the left  and the Microphone Type parameters in the yellow area to the right     Microphone Position Parameters     Centered button  Places the microphone in the center of the speaker cone  also called  on axis  This placement produces a fuller  more powerful sound  suitable for blues or  jazz guitar tones       Off Center button  Places the microphone on the edge of the speaker  also referred to  as off axis  This placement produces a tone that is brighter and sharper  but also  thinner   suitable for cutting rock or R  amp  B guitar parts     When you select either button  the graphic speaker display reflects your choice     Microphone Type Parameters    Condenser button  Emulates the sound of a studio condenser microphone  The sound  of condenser microphones is fine  transparent  and well balanced     Chapter 1 Amps and Pedals      Dynamic button  Emulates the sound of a dynamic cardioid microphone  This  microphone type sound
265. the duration of the reverb     Low Cut slider and field  Frequencies below the set value are filtered out of the reverb  signal  This affects only the tone of the reverb signal  not the original signal     High Cut slider and field  Frequencies above the set value are filtered out of the reverb  signal  This affects only the tone of the reverb signal  not the original signal     Mod ulation  Rate knob and field  Sets the frequency  the speed  of the LFO     Mod ulation  Phase knob and field  Defines the phase of the modulation between the  left and right channels of the reverb signal       At 0    the extreme values  minimum or maximum  of the modulation are achieved  simultaneously on both the left and right channels       Ata value of 180    the extreme values opposite each other  left channel minimum   right channel maximum  or vice versa  are reached simultaneously     Mod ulation  Intensity slider and field  Sets the modulation amount  A value of 0 turns  the delay modulation off     Mix slider and field  Sets the balance between the effect  wet  and original  dry  signals     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects 225    Space Designer Convolution  Reverb       Space Designer is a convolution reverb effect  You can use it to place your audio signals  in exceptionally realistic recreations of real world acoustic environments     Space Designer generates reverb by convolving  or combining  an audio signal with an  impulse response  IR  reverb sample  An impulse response is a recording
266. the signal  and it can add movement to low or sustained sounds          Intensity slider and field  Sets the modulation amount   e Rate knob and field  Defines the frequency  and therefore the speed  of the LFO     e Mix slider and field  Determines the balance of dry and wet signals     Ensemble Effect   The Ensemble combines up to eight chorus effects  Two standard LFOs and one random  LFO  which generates random modulations  enable you to create complex modulations   The Ensemble   s graphic display visually represents what is happening with the processed  signals     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    The Ensemble effect can add a great deal of richness and movement to sounds  particularly  when you use a high number of voices  It is very useful for thickening parts  but it can  also be used to emulate more extreme pitch variations between voices  resulting in a  detuned quality to processed material          Intensity sliders and fields  Set the amount of modulation for each LFO     Rate knobs and fields  Control the frequency of each LFO       Voices slider and field  Determines how many individual chorus instances are used and   therefore  how many voices  or signals  are generated in addition to the original signal       Graphic display  Indicates the shape and intensity of the modulations     e Phase knob and field  Controls the phase relationship between the individual voice  modulations  The value you choose here is dependent on the number of voices  which  is why it i
267. the volume  envelope begins     Decay Time field  Sets the length of the decay phase     Volume decay mode buttons  Set the volume decay curve type       Exp  The output of the volume envelope is shaped by an exponential algorithm  to  generate the most natural sounding reverb tail       Lin  The volume decay will be more linear  and less natural sounding      End Level field  Sets the end volume level  It is expressed as a percentage of the overall  volume envelope       If set to 0   you can fade out the tail       If set to 100   you can t fade out the tail  and the reverb stops abruptly  if the end  point falls within the tail        If the end time falls outside the reverb tail  End Level has no effect     Chapter 12 Space Designer Convolution Reverb    Using Space Designer s Density Envelope   The density envelope allows you to control the density of the synthesized impulse response  over time  You can adjust the density envelope numerically in the parameter bar  and  you can edit the Init Level  Ramp Time  and End Level parameters using the techniques  described in Setting Space Designer s Envelope Parameters     Note  The density envelope is available only in Synthesized IR mode        Weed definition  100      2 005 A       Density Envelope    init level ramp time end level reflection shape    tJ  33    O8is   100  S  LIIN    Init Level field  Sets the initial density  the average number of reflections in a given  period of time  of the reverb  Lowering the density l
268. ther end of the spectrum   extreme processing is possible when you need to radically  alter your sound  All effects and processors are highly optimized for efficient CPU usage        About the Logic Pro Documentation  Logic Pro comes with various documents that will help you get started as well as provide  detailed information about the included applications       Logic Pro User Manual  This manual provides comprehensive instructions for using  Logic Pro to set up a recording system  compose music  edit audio and MIDI files  and  output audio for CD productions       Exploring Logic Pro  This booklet provides a fast paced introduction to the main features  and tasks in Logic Pro  encouraging hands on exploration for new users      Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support  This manual describes the configuration and use of  control surfaces with Logic Pro      Logic Pro Instruments  This manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the  powerful collection of instruments included with Logic Pro    e Logic Pro Effects  This manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful  collection of effects included with Logic Pro      Working with Apogee Hardware  This manual describes the use of Apogee hardware  with Logic Pro      Impulse Response Utility User Manual  This manual provides comprehensive instructions    for using Impulse Response Utility to create your own mono  stereo  and surround  impulse responses for Space Designer  the Logic Pro convolution based r
269. tion click a parameter value to reset it to the default setting  If multiple taps are selected   Option clicking a parameter of any tap resets all selected taps to the default value for  that parameter     filter HP  cutoff  LP slope eso      d pitch transp   flip pan spread   mute level                                                                      20Hz   20000H2      MEM de CZ 7so oms ff E os so s   EI Da centers 100 S   M  0 648                 Filter On Offbutton  Enables or disables the highpass and lowpass filters for the selected  tap       HP Cutoff LP fields  Sets the cutoff frequencies  in Hz  for the highpass and lowpass  filters       Slope buttons  Determines the steepness of the highpass and lowpass filter slope  Click  the 6 dB button for a gentler filter slope  or click the 12 dB button for a steeper  more  pronounced filtering effect     Note  You cannot set the slope of the highpass and lowpass filters independently     Reso nance  field  Sets the amount of filter resonance for both filters       Tap Delay fields  Shows the number and name of the selected tap in the upper section  and the delay time in the lower section     e Pitch On Off button  Enables or disables pitch transposition for the selected tap       Transp ose  fields  The left field sets the amount of pitch transposition in semitones   The right field fine tunes each semitone step in cents  1 100th of a semitone        Flip buttons  Swaps the left and right side of the stereo or surround 
270. tions  that you can clearly discern before the diffuse reverb tail builds up  These early reflections  are essential in human perception of spatial characteristics  such as the size and shape  of a room        Signal Discrete Diffuse reverb tail  reflections    Reflection pattern reverberation             This chapter covers the following    e Plates  Digital Reverb Effects  and Convolution Reverb  p  214   e AVerb  p  214    e EnVerb  p  215    e GoldVerb  p  218    e PlatinumVerb  p  221    e SilverVerb  p  225     213       214    Plates  Digital Reverb Effects  and Convolution Reverb   The first form of reverb used in music production was actually a special room with hard  surfaces  called an echo chamber  It was used to add echoes to the signal  Mechanical  devices  including metal plates and springs  were also used to add reverberation to the  output of musical instruments and microphones     Digital recording introduced digital reverb effects  which consist of thousands of delays  of varying lengths and intensities  The time differences between the original signal and  the arrival of the early reflections can be adjusted by a parameter commonly known as   predelay  The average number of reflections in a given period of time is determined by   the density parameter  The regularity or irregularity of the density is controlled with the  diffusion parameter     Today s computers make it possible to sample the reverb characteristics of real spaces   using convolution reverb
271. tle of the appropriate signal is reduced     3 If you encounter artifacts  use the smoothing parameters        Denoiser Main Parameters  The Denoiser offers the following main parameters     Threshold slider and field Noise Type slider and field    Graphic display       Reduce slider and field      Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level  Signals that fall below this level are  reduced by the Denoiser      Reduce slider and field  Sets the amount of noise reduction applied to signals that fall  below the threshold  When reducing noise  remember that each 6 dB reduction is  equivalent to halving the volume level  and each 6 dB increase equals a doubling of  the volume level      250 Chapter 13 Specialized Effects and Utilities    Note  If the noise floor of your recording is very high  more than    68 dB   reducing it  to a level of    83 to    78 dB should be sufficient  provided this doesn   t introduce any  audible side effects  This effectively reduces the noise by more than 10 dB  to less than  half of the original  noise  volume      Noise Type slider and field  Determines the type of noise that you want to reduce     A value of 0 equals white noise  equal frequency distribution      Positive values change the noise type to pink noise  harmonic noise  greater bass   response     e Negative values change the noise type to blue noise  hissy tape noise        Graphic display  Shows how the lowest volume levels of your audio material   which  should be mostly  o
272. to stereo channels  each tap contains a line showing its pan position       For stereo to stereo channels  each tap contains a dot showing its stereo balance  A  line extending outwards from the dot indicates the tap   s stereo spread       For surround channels  each tap contains a line representing its surround angle  for  details  see Working with Delay Designer in Surround      e Level button  Shows the relative volume level of each tap     Tip  You can temporarily switch the Tap display to Level view from one of the other  view modes by pressing Command Option     Chapter 2 Delay Effects    Zooming and Navigating Delay Designer s Tap Display  You can use Delay Designer   s Overview display to zoom and to navigate the Tap display  area     Overview display       Tip  If the Overview display is hidden behind a tap  you can move it to the foreground  by holding down Shift     To zoom the Tap display  Do one of the following     Vertically drag the highlighted section  the bright rectangle  of the Overview display        Horizontally drag the highlighted bars   to the left or right of the bright rectangle   in  the Overview display        Note  The Autozoom button needs to be disabled when manually zooming with the  Overview display  When you zoom in on a small group of taps  the Overview display  continues to show all taps  The area shown in the Tap display is indicated by the bright  rectangle in the Overview display     Chapter 2 Delay Effects 55    56    To move to diffe
273. tone stepped  glissandi  but the intonation will be perfect  If the Response value is too low  the pitch  of the output signal won t change quickly enough  The optimum setting for this  parameter depends on the singing style  tempo  vibrato  and accuracy of the original  performance       Detune slider and field  Detunes the output signal by the set value     Defining the Pitch Correction Effect   s Quantization Grid   Use the Pitch Correction effect   s Normal and Low buttons to determine the pitch range  that you want to scan for notes that need correction  Normal is the default range and  works for most audio material  Low should be used only for audio material that contains  extremely low frequencies  below 100 Hz   which may result in inaccurate pitch detection   These parameters have no effect on the sound  they are simply optimized tracking options  for the chosen target pitch range     The Scale pop up menu allows you to choose different pitch quantization grids  The scale  that is set manually  with the keyboard graphic in the plug in window  is called the User  Scale  The default setting is the chromatic scale  If you re unsure of the intervals used in  any given scale  choose it in the Scale menu and look at the keyboard graphic  You can  alter any note in the chosen scale by clicking the keyboard keys  Any such adjustments  overwrite the existing user scale settings     There is only one user scale per project  You can  however  create multiple user scales  and sa
274. tons     e Inv  inverse mode   In Tremolo mode  the bass compartment rotates at a fast speed     while the horn compartment rotates slowly  This is reversed in Chorale mode  In  Brake mode  both rotors stop     Chapter9 Modulation Effects      910  The 910  or Memphis mode  stops the bass drum rotation at slow speed  while  the speed of the horn compartment can be switched  This may be desirable  if you re  after a solid bass sound but still want treble movement     e Sync  The acceleration and deceleration of the horn and bass drums are roughly the  same  This sounds as if the two are locked  but the effect is clearly audible only during  acceleration or deceleration       Rotor Fast Rate slider  Adjust to set the maximum possible rotor speed  Tremolo   The  Tremolo rotation speed is displayed in Hertz       Acc Dec Scale slider  The Leslie motors need to physically accelerate and decelerate the  speaker horns in the cabinets  and their power to do so is limited  Use the Acc Dec  Scale parameter to determine the time it takes to get the rotors up to a determined  speed  and the length of time it takes for them to slow down       Set the slider to the far left to switch to the preset speed immediately     As you drag the slider to the right  it takes more time to hear the speed changes     e At the default position  1  the behavior is Leslie like     Rotor Cabinet Microphone Parameters  The Rotor Cabinet offers the following microphone parameters     Mic Distance slider  Dete
275. tor Output Parameters     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 143    144    EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Analysis In Parameters   The parameters in the Analysis In section determine how the input signal is analyzed and  used by the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator  You should be as precise as possible with these  parameters  to ensure the best possible speech intelligibility and accurate tracking     A A     Freeze    Attack Release    Analysis in Bands      Syathess i a       Attack knob  Determines how quickly each envelope follower   coupled to each analysis  filter band   reacts to rising signals     Release knob  Determines how quickly each envelope follower   coupled to each analysis  filter band   reacts to falling signals     Freeze button  When enabled  holds   or freezes   the current analysis sound spectrum  indefinitely  While Freeze is enabled  the analysis filter bank ignores the input source   and the Attack and Release knobs have no effect     Bands field  Determines the number   up to 20   of frequency bands used by the  EVOC 20 TrackOscillator     Analysis In pop up menu  Sets the analysis signal source  The choices are       Track  Uses the input audio signal of the channel strip in which the EVOC 20  TrackOscillator is inserted as the analysis signal       Side Chain  Uses a side chain as the analysis signal  You choose the side chain source  channel strip from the Side Chain pop up menu at the top of the plug in window     Note  If Side Chain is chosen and no Side Chain channel s
276. tors  or digital  circuits  Vacuum tubes were used in audio amplifiers before the development of digital  audio technology  and they are still used in musical instrument amplifiers today  When  overdriven  they produce a type of distortion that many people find musically pleasing   and which has become a familiar part of the sound of rock and pop music  Analog tube  distortion adds a distinctive warmth and bite to the signal     There are also distortion effects that intentionally cause clipping and digital distortion of  the signal  These can be used to modify vocal  music  and other tracks to produce an  intense  unnatural effect  or to create sound effects     Distortion effects include parameters for tone  which let you shape the way the distortion  alters the signal  often as a frequency based filter   and for gain  which let you control  how much the distortion alters the output level of the signal        Warning  When set to high output levels  distortion effects can damage your  hearing   and your speakers  When you adjust effect settings  it is recommended that  you lower the output level of the track  and raise the level gradually when you are  finished        This chapter covers the following   e Bitcrusher  p  78    e Clip Distortion  p  79    e Distortion Effect  p  80    e Distortion Il  p  81    e Overdrive  p  81    e Phase Distortion  p  82     77       78    Bitcrusher   Bitcrusher is a low resolution digital distortion effect  You can use it to emulate the 
277. toward the left end of the knobs section       EQ pop up menu  Click the word EQ or CUSTOM EQ above the Bass  Mids  and Treble  knobs to open the EQ pop up menu  which contains the following EQ models  British  Bright  Vintage  U S  Classic  Modern  and Boutique  Each EQ model has unique tonal  qualities that affect the way the Bass  Mids  and Treble knobs respond  See Amp Designer  Equalizer Type Reference Table       Bass  Mids  and Treble knobs  Adjust the frequency ranges of the EQ models  similar to  the tone knobs on a hardware guitar amplifier  The behavior and response of these  knobs changes when different EQ models are chosen     Amp Designer Equalizer Type Reference Table   You can choose an Equalizer type by clicking the word EQ or CUSTOM EQ above the Bass   Mids  and Treble knobs in the knobs section  The table below covers the properties of  each EQ type available in Amp Designer     EQ type Description    British Bright Inspired by the EQ of British combo amps of the 1960s  It is loud  and aggressive  with even bolder highs than the Vintage EQ  This  EQ is useful if you want more treble definition without an overly  clean sound        Vintage Emulates the EQ response of American Tweed style amps and the  vintage British stack amps that used a very similar circuit  It is loud  and somewhat distortion prone  This EQ is useful if you want to  roughen the sound        U S  Classic Derived from the EQ circuit of the American Blackface style amps   The tone is of hig
278. tracks     It will  however  provide noticeable timing improvements on reasonably tight percussive  and melodic material  played in an eighth or quarter note feel   If a large amount of timing  correction is needed  and transients are shifted too far  you may notice a number of audio  artifacts  Therefore  you should try to strike a balance between sound quality and timing  enhancement     Important  For technical reasons  the Enhance Timing plug in works only on audio channel  strips and must be inserted in the top Insert slot     x    Audio 2  P View     Show CS v  Show Insert      Bypass  lt       defaultdef    Enhance Timing         Intensity slider and field  Determines the amount of timing enhancement  Audio  transients that don t fall on the grid divisions  determined by the value chosen in the  Note Grid pop up menu  are corrected       Note Grid pop up menu  Provides a choice of four grid divisions  The grid divisions serve  as reference points for the timing correction process  As a tip for eighth note triplets   try the 1 12 note setting     Exciter   The Exciter generates high frequency components that are not part of the original signal   It does this by employing a nonlinear distortion process that resembles overdrive and  distortion effects     Unlike these effects  however  the Exciter passes the input signal through a highpass filter  before feeding it into the harmonics  distortion  generator  This results in artificial  harmonics being added to the original
279. trigger the internal synthesizer     Analysis ia    Synthesis in       Synthesis In pop up menu  Sets the tracking signal source  The choices are       Oscillator  Osc    Sets the tracking oscillator as the synthesis source  The oscillator  mirrors  or tracks  the pitch of the analysis input signal  Choosing Osc activates the  other parameters in the Synthesis section  If Osc is not chosen  the FM Ratio  FM Int   and other parameters in this section have no effect          Track  Uses the input audio signal of the channel strip  in which the EVOC 20  TrackOscillator is inserted  as the synthesis signal  which drives the internal synthesizer     Side Chain  Uses a side chain as the synthesis signal  You choose the side chain source  channel from the Side Chain pop up menu at the top of the EVOC 20 TrackOscillator  window     Note  If you choose Side Chain and no Side Chain channel is assigned  the EVOC 20  TrackOscillator reverts to Track mode operation     Bands field  Determines the number of frequency bands used by the Synthesis In section     Basic Tracking Oscillator Parameters   The tracking oscillator follows the pitch of incoming monophonic audio signals and  mirrors these pitches with a synthesized sound  The FM tone generator for the tracking  oscillator consists of two oscillators  each of which generates a sine wave  The frequency  of Oscillator 1  the carrier  is modulated by Oscillator 2  the modulator   which deforms  the sine wave of Oscillator 1  This results 
280. trip is assigned  the EVOC 20  TrackOscillator reverts to Track mode operation     Using EVOC 20 TrackOscillator Analysis In Parameters  This section outlines some settings and approaches for the parameters of the Analysis In  section     Setting the Attack Time   Longer attack times result in a slower tracking response to transients   level spikes    of  the analysis input signal  A long attack time on percussive input signals  such as a spoken  word or hi hat part  will translate into a less articulated vocoder effect  Therefore  you  should set the Attack parameter to the lowest possible value to enhance articulation     Chapter 6 Filter Effects    Setting the Release Time   Longer release times cause the analysis input signal transients to sustain for a longer  period  at the vocoder   s output  A long release time on percussive input signals  such as  a spoken word or hi hat part  will translate into a less articulated vocoder effect  Use of  extremely short release times results in rough  grainy vocoder sounds  Release values of  around 8 to 10 ms are useful starting points     Using Freeze   The frozen analysis signal can capture a particular characteristic of the source signal   which is then imposed as a complex sustained filter shape on the Synthesis section  The  following are examples of when this could be useful     If you are using a spoken word pattern as a source  the Freeze button could capture the  attack or tail phase of an individual word within the patter
281. ts the amount of saturation   Tone sets the overall color of the distortion  Higher Tone values  increase the treble content of the signal  but there is a  corresponding decrease in overall volume  Texture can smooth out  or roughen up the distortion  Grain sets the amount of nonlinear  distortion applied to the signal  The effect output is controlled with  the Level knob        Octafuzz A fat fuzz effect  that can deliver a soft  saturated distortion  Fuzz  controls the input gain  Level sets the ratio between the distorted  and source signals  The Tone knob sets the cutoff frequency of the  highpass filter        Rawk  Distortion A metal hard rock distortion effect  Crunch sets the amount of  saturation applied to the input signal  Output gain is set with Level   Tonal color is set with the Tone knob  making the sound brighter  at higher values        Vintage Drive Overdrive effect that emulates the distortion produced by a field  effect transistor  FET   which is commonly used in solid state  amplifiers  When saturated  FETs generate a warmer sounding  distortion than bipolar transistors  such as those emulated by  Grinder   Drive sets the saturation amount for the input signal  Tone  sets the frequency for the high cut filter  resulting in a softer or  harsher tone  The Fat switch  when at the top position  enhances  lower frequency content in the signal  Level sets the overall output  level of the effect        Modulation Pedals  This section describes the modulation eff
282. ture the signal in the simulated room     Note  Spacing the microphones slightly farther apart than the distance between two  human ears generally delivers the best  and most realistic  results  This parameter is  available only in stereo instances of the effect       ER Scale slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Scales the early reflections along  the time axis  influencing the Room Shape  Room Size  and Stereo Base parameters  simultaneously     Chapter 11 Reverb Effects    PlatinumVerb Reverb Parameters  The PlatinumVerb offers the following Reverb parameters          Initial Delay slider and field  Sets the time between the original signal and the diffuse  reverb tail       Spread slider and field  Controls the stereo image of the reverb  At 0   the effect  generates a monaural reverb  At 200   the stereo base is artificially expanded       Crossover slider and field  Defines the frequency at which the input signal is split into  two frequency bands  for separate processing       Low Ratio slider and field  Determines the relative reverb times of the bass and high  bands  It is expressed as a percentage  At 100   the reverb time of the two bands is  identical  At values below 100   the reverb time of frequencies below the crossover  frequency is shorter  At values greater than 100   the reverb time for low frequencies  is longer       Low Freq Level slider and field  Sets the level of the low frequency reverb signal  At 0 dB   the volume of the two bands is equal 
283. ty slider  Controls the amount of Formant Shift modulation by the Shift  LFO     Rate knobs and fields  Determine the speed of modulation  Values to the left of the  center positions are synchronized with the host application tempo and include bar  values  triplet values  and more  Values to the right of the center positions are non  synchronized and are displayed in Hertz  cycles per second      Note  The ability to use synchronous bar values could be used to perform a formant  shift every four bars on a cycled one bar percussion part  for example  Alternately  you  could perform the same formant shift on every eighth note triplet within the same  part  Either method can generate interesting results  and can lead to new ideas  or add  new life to old audio material     Chapter 6 Filter Effects 139      Waveform buttons  Set the waveform type used by the Shift LFO on the left side or  Fade LFO on the right side  You can choose between triangle  falling and rising sawtooth   square up and down around zero  bipolar  good for trills   square up from zero  unipolar   good for changing between two definable pitches   a random stepped waveform  S amp H    and a smoothed random waveform for each LFO     LFO Fade Intensity slider  Controls the amount of Fade AB modulation by the Fade LFO     Tip  LFO modulations are the key to some extraordinary effects that can be obtained   with the EVOC 20 Filterbank  Set up either completely different or complementary filter  curves in both filte
284. u to make precise adjustments     To adjust Match EQ curve values   Drag horizontally to shift the peak frequency for the band  over the entire spectrum    Drag vertically to adjust the gain of the band    Shift drag vertically to adjust the Q Factor    Option drag to reset the gain to 0 dB    Note  If you manually modify the filter curve  you can restore it to the original  or flat     curve by Option clicking on the background of the Analyzer display  Option click the  background again to restore the most recent curve     The Q factor of the filter is determined  and set  by the vertical distance between the  clicked position and the curve     To set the Match EQ Q factor  Click directly on the curve to set the maximum Q value of 10  for notch like filters      Click above or below the curve to decrease the Q value  The farther you click from the  curve  the smaller the value  down to the minimum of 0 3      The colors and modes of the dB scales on the left and right of the display are automatically  adapted to the active function  If the Analyzer is active  the left scale displays the average  spectrum in the signal  while the right scale serves as a reference for the peak values of  the Analyzer  A dynamic range of 60 dB is shown by default  If this is not precise enough  for your edits  you can increase the range     To change the Match EQ scale range  Drag either scale to set values of up to  20 dB and    100 cB     To change Match EQ gain with the scales  Drag either s
285. uld set   in order to effectively pitch shift the signal       Crossfade slider and field  Extended Parameters area   Sets the range  expressed as a  percentage of the original signal  used to analyze the input signal       Stereo Link radio buttons  Extended Parameters area   Select Inv  to invert the stereo  channel s signals  with processing for the right channel occurring on the left  and vice  versa  Select Normal to leave the signal as it is     Follow these steps when pitch shifting  Set the Semi Tones slider for the amount of transposition  or pitch shift     Set the Cents slider for the amount of detuning     Click the Drums  Speech  or Vocals button to select the algorithm that best matches the  material you are working with     If you are working with material that doesn   t fit any of these categories  experiment with  each of the algorithms  starting with Speech   compare the results  and use the one that  best suits your material     Tip  While auditioning and comparing different settings  it   s often a good idea to  temporarily set the Mix parameter to 100   as Pitch Shifter Il artifacts are easier to hear     Vocal Transformer   The Vocal Transformer can be used to transpose the pitch of a vocal line  to augment or  diminish the range of the melody  or even to reduce it to a single note that mirrors the  pitches of a melody  No matter how you change the pitches of the melody  the constituent  parts of the signal  formants  remain the same     You can shift th
286. unique tool that can  be used to achieve results that differ from other dynamic processors          Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level  Signals that exceed the threshold    have their attack and release phase levels altered        Attack  Gain slider and field  Boosts or attenuates the attack phase of the signal  When    the Gain slider is set to the center position   0    the signal is unaffected       Lookahead slider and field  Sets the pre read analysis time for the incoming signal  This    enables the Enveloper to know in advance what signals are coming  enabling accurate  and fast processing        Attack  Time knob and field  Determines the amount of time it takes for the signal to    increase from the threshold level to the maximum Gain level   e Display  Shows the attack and release curves applied to the signal        Release  Time knob and field  Determines the amount of time it takes for the signal to  fall from the maximum gain level to the threshold level        Release  Gain slider and field  Boosts or attenuates the release phase of the signal  When  the Gain slider is set to the center position   0    the signal is unaffected       Out Level slider and field  Sets the level of the output signal     Using the Enveloper    The most important parameters of the Enveloper are the two Gain sliders  one on each    side of the central display  These govern the Attack and Release levels of each respective  phase     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors    Bo
287. us  The ring modulator was used extensively  on jazz rock and fusion records in the early 1970s     The frequency shifter moves the frequency content of the input signal by a fixed amount  and  in doing so  alters the frequency relationship of the original harmonics  The resulting  sounds range from sweet and spacious phasing effects to strange robotic timbres     Note  Frequency shifting should not be confused with pitch shifting  Pitch shifting  transposes the original signal  leaving its harmonic frequency relationship intact     Chapter9 Modulation Effects    192    Getting to Know the Ringshifter Interface  The Ringshifter interface consists of six main sections     Mode buttons Delay parameters Output parameters      EEE       S     Freq Shift    TErequenc        Oscillator parameters Envelope follower LFO parameters  parameters    Mode buttons  Determine whether the Ringshifter operates as frequency shifter or ring  modulator See Setting the Ringshifter Mode     Oscillator parameters  Use these to configure the internal sine wave oscillator  which  modulates the amplitude of the input signal   in both frequency shifter modes and  the ring modulator OSC mode  See Using the Ringshifter   s Oscillator     Delay parameters  Use these to delay the effect signal  See Using the Ringshifter   s Delay     Envelope follower parameters  The oscillator frequency and output signal can be  modulated with an envelope follower  See Modulating the Ringshifter with the Envelope  Followe
288. usically  This is because human hearing is more responsive to the overall power of the  signal than to single peaks  As a basic setting for most applications  the centered position  is recommended     Setting Multipressor Output Parameters   The Out slider sets the overall output level  Set Lookahead to higher values when the  Peak RMS fields are set to higher values  farther towards RMS   Set Auto Gain to On to  reference the overall processing to 0 dB  making the output louder     Noise Gate   The Noise Gate is commonly used to suppress unwanted noise that is audible when the  audio signal is at a low level  You can use it to remove background noise  crosstalk from  other signal sources  and low level hum  among other uses     The Noise Gate works by allowing signals above the threshold level to pass unimpeded   while reducing signals below the threshold level  This effectively removes lower level  parts of the signal  while allowing the desired parts of the audio to pass     Chapter 4 Dynamics Processors 103    104    Noise Gate Parameters  The Noise Gate has the following parameters        Threshold slider and field  Sets the threshold level  Signals that fall below the threshold  will be reduced in level     Reduction slider and field  Sets the amount of signal reduction     Attack knob and field  Sets the amount of time it takes to fully open the gate after the  signal exceeds the threshold     Hold knob and field  Sets the amount of time the gate is kept open after the
289. v    Bypass  lt   gt   default Bypass  lt   gt   default    High Pass Filter Low Pass Filter    Frequency    1000Hz    Frequency     2000Hz  amp   Order      3n 4   Order       Smoothing            Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency       Order slider and field  Sets the filter order  The more orders used  the stronger the filtering  effect       Smoothing slider and field  Adjusts the amount of smoothing  in milliseconds     High Shelving and Low Shelving EQ   The Low Shelving EQ affects only the frequency range that falls below the selected  frequency  The High Shelving EQ affects only the frequency range above the selected  frequency     Inst 1 Inst 1    gp View y  ShowCS v Show insert v p View   ShowCS v Show insert v    Bypass ki  gt   default Bypass  lt   gt   default    High Shelving EQ Low Shelving EQ    Gain     0 0dB a Gain    0 0dB a    Frequency     10000Hz   Frequency      100Hz a         Gain slider and field  Sets the amount of cut or boost       Frequency slider and field  Sets the cutoff frequency     128 Chapter5 Equalizers    Parametric EQ   The Parametric EQ is a simple filter with a variable center frequency  It can be used to   boost or cut any frequency band in the audio spectrum  either with a wide frequency  range  or as a notch filter with a very narrow range  A symmetrical frequency range on  either side of the center frequency is boosted or cut      x  Inst 1  gp View   ShowCS v Show insert v    Bypass  lt   gt   default    Param
290. ve them as Pitch Correction plug in settings files     Tip  The drone scale uses a fifth as a quantization grid  and the single scale defines a single  note  Neither of these scales is meant to result in realistic singing voices  so if you re after  interesting effects  you should give them both a try     Open the Root pop up menu to choose the root note of the scale   If you chose user scale  or chromatic in the Scale pop up menu  the Root pop up menu is non functional   You  may freely transpose the major and minor scales  and scales named after chords     Chapter 10 Pitch Effects 205    206    Excluding Notes from Pitch Correction   You can use the Pitch Correction effect   s onscreen keyboard to exclude notes from the  pitch quantization grid  When you first open the effect  all notes of the chromatic scale  are selected  This means that every incoming note will be altered to fit the next semitone  step of the chromatic scale  If the intonation of the singer is poor  this might lead to notes  being incorrectly identified and corrected to an unwanted pitch  For example  the singer  may have intended to sing an E  but the note is actually closer to a D   If you don   t want  the D  in the song  the D  key can be disabled on the keyboard  Because the original  pitch was sung closer to an E than a D  it will be corrected to an E     Note  The settings are valid for all octave ranges  Individual settings for different octaves  aren t provided     Use of the small bypass button
291. vels are shown simultaneously  with RMS levels appearing as dark blue  bars and Peak levels appearing as light blue bars  When the level exceeds 0 dB  the portion  of the bar above the 0 dB mark turns red     Current peak values are displayed numerically  in dB increments  above the Level Meter   Click in the display to reset peak values     Using the MultiMeter   s Correlation Meter  The Correlation Meter gauges the phase relationship of a stereo signal  The Correlation  Meter   s scale values indicate the following          A 1 correlation value indicates that the left and right channels correlate 100   In other  words  the left and right signals are in phase and are the same shape       Correlation values in the blue zone  between  1 and the middle position  indicate that  the stereo signal is mono compatible     e The middle position indicates the highest allowable amount of left right divergence   which is often audible as an extremely wide stereo effect     Chapter 8 Metering Tools 173    174    e When the Correlation Meter moves into the red area to the left of the center position   out of phase material is present  This will lead to phase cancellations if the stereo signal  is combined into a mono signal     Using the MultiMeter Peak Parameters   The MultiMeter Peak parameters are used to enable disable the peak hold function and  to reset the peak segments of all meter types  You can also determine a temporary peak  hold duration        e Hold button  Activates peak 
292. veral ways to extend the  stereo base  or perception of space   including use of reverbs or other effects and altering  the signal s phase  These options can all sound great  but may also weaken the overall  sound of your mix by ruining transient responses  for example     Chapter 7 Imaging Processors 165    166    Stereo Spread extends the stereo base by distributing a selectable number of frequency  bands from the middle frequency range to the left and right channels  This is done  alternately     middle frequencies to the left channel  middle frequencies to the right  channel  and so on  This greatly increases the perception of stereo width without making  the sound totally unnatural  especially when used on mono recordings        Lower Int ensity  slider and field  Sets the amount of stereo base extension for the lower  frequency bands     Upper Int ensity  slider and field  Sets the amount of stereo base extension for the upper  frequency bands     Note  When setting the Lower and Upper Int  sliders  be aware that the stereo effect  is most apparent in the middle and higher frequencies  so distributing low frequencies  between the left and right speakers can significantly alter the energy of the overall mix   For this reason  use low values for the Lower Int  parameter  and avoid setting the Lower  Freq  parameter below 300 Hz     Graphic display  Shows the number of bands the signal is divided into  and the intensity  of the Stereo Spread effect in the upper and lower f
293. vert buttons  Invert the phase of the selected channel     e Mute buttons  Mute the selected channel     Test Oscillator   The Test Oscillator is useful for tuning studio equipment and instruments  and can be  inserted as both an instrument or effect plug in  It operates in two modes  generating  either a static frequency or a sine sweep     Chapter 14 Utilities and Tools    263    264    In the first mode  default mode   it starts generating the test signal as soon as it is inserted     You can switch it off by bypassing it  In the second mode  activated by clicking the Sine    Sweep button   Test Oscillator generates a user defined frequency spectrum tone  sweep   when triggered with the Trigger button        Waveform buttons  Select the type of waveform to be used for test tone generation     The Square Wave and Needle Pulse waveforms are available as either aliased or  anti aliased versions   the latter when used in conjunction with the Anti Aliased  button     Needle Pulse is a single needle impulse waveform     If the Sine Sweep button is active  the fixed oscillator settings in the Waveform section  are disabled     Frequency knob and field  Determines the frequency of the oscillator  default is 1 kHz      Sine Sweep button  Generates a sine wave sweep  of the frequency spectrum you set  with the Start Freq and End Freq fields      Time field  Sets the duration of the sine wave sweep     Start Freq and End Freq fields  Drag vertically to define the oscillator frequency
294. y  and depth   also called intensity   controls     You can also control the ratio of the affected  wet  signal and the original  dry  signal   Some modulation effects include feedback parameters  which add part of the effect   s  output back into the effect input     Other modulation effects involve pitch  The most basic type of pitch modulation effect  is vibrato  It uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the sound  Unlike other pitch  modulation effects  vibrato alters only the delayed signal     More complex modulation effects  such as Ensemble  mix several delayed signals with  the original signal    This chapter covers the following   e Chorus Effect  p  184    e Ensemble Effect  p  184   Flanger Effect  p  186   Microphaser  p  187   Modulation Delay  p  187   Phaser Effect  p  190   Ringshifter  p  191    Rotor Cabinet Effect  p  197   Scanner Vibrato Effect  p  199     183       184      Spreader  p  201   e Tremolo Effect  p  202     Chorus Effect  The Chorus effect delays the original signal  The delay time is modulated with an LFO   The delayed  modulated signal is mixed with the original  dry signal     You can use the Chorus effect to enrich the incoming signal and create the impression  that multiple instruments or voices are being played in unison  The slight delay time  variations generated by the LFO simulate the subtle pitch and timing differences heard  when several musicians or vocalists perform together  Using chorus also adds fullness or  richness to 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Gainward 426018336-1794 NVIDIA GeForce GTX 580 3GB graphics card  Infrared Thermometers  Mounting Instructions  Six Button Mounted Switch RPS06-** Installation  Gateway 820GM User's Manual  Craftsman 26-in. Service Parts  10MS3345 October Sale NoPrice:Standard Default  Philips 42" Digital widescreen flat TV 42" HD-Ready Black    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file